AD - GT1000 Man-EN - 1000088613-05-07 C

GT1000
Hardware & Software Manual
Answer Drives S.r.l. - Partially owned by Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali -S.p.A.
answerdrives.com
GT1000
HARDWARE AND SOFWARE MANUAL
Code: IMGT10002EN
Revision: 0.3
Software Version 1G0006B1
Date July 06
For further information and comments, please contact us at:
www.answerdrives.com
Answer Drives S.r.l. thanks you for choosing a GT1000 product and for any useful advice to improve this manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... i
1 Preface .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Safety Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................................2
2 Reception, Storage and Technical data
2.1 Reception, Unload, Unpackaging, and Inspection of the Inverter ................................................................................5
2.1.1 Unpackaging Sizes I, II, III, IIIX, IIIL............................................................................................................5
2.1.2 Unpackaging Sizes IV , V , VI .....................................................................................................................5
2.1.3 Unpackaging Sizes VII 6
2.2 Storage .........................................................................................................................................................................6
2.3.1 Technical Data ............................................................................................................................................7
2.3.2 Identification mark.......................................................................................................................................7
2.3.3 Environmental conditions admitted.............................................................................................................8
2.3.4 Electric data ................................................................................................................................................9
2.3.5 Cooling......................................................................................................................................................10
2.3.6 Overall dimensions and weight.................................................................................................................10
2.4 Standards ...................................................................................................................................................................11
3 Installation
3.1 Mechanical Installation ...............................................................................................................................................13
3.1.1 Assembly...................................................................................................................................................14
3.2 Electrical Installation...................................................................................................................................................16
3.2.1 Diagram of connections for power and control .........................................................................................17
3.2.2 Cable of power supply, fuses of power supply and auxiliaries .................................................................18
3.3 Precautions of installation to reduce electromagnetic emissions...............................................................................20
3.4 Reactors .....................................................................................................................................................................27
3.5 Section of control........................................................................................................................................................29
3.5.1 Microprocessor control board ...................................................................................................................29
3.5.2 Description of the control signals..............................................................................................................31
3.5.2.1 Digital commands ...........................................................................................................................31
3.5.2.2 Signals to the speed.......................................................................................................................33
3.5.2.3 Analog outputs................................................................................................................................33
3.5.2.4 Digital outputs.................................................................................................................................33
3.6 Installation checklist....................................................................................................................................................34
4 Maintenance
4.1 Safety precautions......................................................................................................................................................35
4.2 Preventive maintenance.............................................................................................................................................36
4.3 Disposal......................................................................................................................................................................36
5 Application notes
5.1 Principle of operation..................................................................................................................................................37
5.1.1 Scheme of the inverter .............................................................................................................................38
5.1.2 Useful formulas ........................................................................................................................................39
5.2 Selection of the inverter..............................................................................................................................................40
5.3 Application notes ........................................................................................................................................................40
5.4 Applications with special motors.................................................................................................................................40
5.5 Motor choice ...............................................................................................................................................................41
6 Options
6.1 Braking Unit ................................................................................................................................................................43
6.1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................43
6.1.2 Installation.................................................................................................................................................43
6.1.3 Choice of the resistor ................................................................................................................................44
6.2 Keypad........................................................................................................................................................................45
6.2.1 Keypad installation....................................................................................................................................45
6.2.2 Installation on panel door..........................................................................................................................46
6.3 Expansion boards for encoder input (GEDEA1and GEDEA)....................................................................................47
6.3.1 Boards description ...................................................................................................................................47
6.3.2 Boards installation.....................................................................................................................................48
6.3.3 Encoder check ..........................................................................................................................................48
6.3.4 First startup of the system inverter-motor-encoder...................................................................................50
6.3.5 Special applications ..................................................................................................................................50
IMGT10002EN I
Table of contents GT1000
7 Startup-Test-Display and Programming

7.1 Manufacturer's pre-setting..........................................................................................................................................51
7.2 Description of the display and of the keypad..............................................................................................................51
7.3 Structure and modification of the parameters ............................................................................................................53
7.3.1 Example of programming..........................................................................................................................54
7.4 Storage of the protected parameters..........................................................................................................................55
7.4.1 Parameter modification lock/unlock (PASSWORD)..................................................................................55
7.4.2 "LOCAL" mode lock/unlock.......................................................................................................................55
7.5 First start ....................................................................................................................................................................55
7.5.1 First start from keypad ..............................................................................................................................55
7.5.2 Rapid commissioning................................................................................................................................56
7.6 Restoration of the manufacturer's settings ................................................................................................................56
7.7 Parameter tables ........................................................................................................................................................57
7.8 Description of the parameters ....................................................................................................................................66
7.8.1 Monitor ......................................................................................................................................................66
7.8.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................68
7.8.3 Parameters of the motor-inverter coupling ...............................................................................................69
7.8.4 References................................................................................................................................................70
7.8.5 Ramps.......................................................................................................................................................72
7.8.6 Volts on Hertz (V/F) ..................................................................................................................................73
7.8.7 Speed regulation.......................................................................................................................................76
7.8.8 Torque regulation......................................................................................................................................77
7.8.9 Internal regulators .....................................................................................................................................81
7.8.10 Various internal enabling commands........................................................................................................82
7.8.11 Configuration of analog outputs................................................................................................................84
7.8.12 Configuration analog inputs ......................................................................................................................85
7.8.13 Configuration digital outputs .....................................................................................................................86
7.8.14 Configuration digital inputs........................................................................................................................87
7.8.15 Parameters of serial configuration ............................................................................................................88
7.8.16 Serial OUT (Profibus)................................................................................................................................89
7.8.17 Serial IN (Profibus)....................................................................................................................................89
7.8.18 Diagnostic Configuration...........................................................................................................................90
7.8.19 Enabling of auxiliary functions ..................................................................................................................91
7.8.20 Motor potentiometer: Fn1.xx .....................................................................................................................92
7.8.21 Flight restart: Fn2.xx (V/F) ........................................................................................................................94
7.8.22 Auto reset: Fn3.xx.....................................................................................................................................95
7.8.23 Frequency speed reference (FOC): Fn4.xx ..............................................................................................96
7.8.24 Kinetic recovery (V/F): Fn5.xx...................................................................................................................97
7.8.25 PID function: Fn6.xx..................................................................................................................................99
7.8.26 Miscellany 1: Fn7.xx ...............................................................................................................................102
7.8.27 Compliance function (FOC) ....................................................................................................................103
7.8.28 Function of "Speed profile" .....................................................................................................................104
7.8.29 Motor thermal protection by means of PTC or NTC ...............................................................................105
7.8.30 Function of the control of the pumping system: PMP.xx.........................................................................106
7.9 Description of the protections / removal of the causes.............................................................................................111
7.10 Remarks concerning the reserved parameters ........................................................................................................113
8 Serial Interface ANSI-X3.28-2.5-A4
8.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................115
8.2 Serial interface RS485..............................................................................................................................................115
8.3 The protocol ANSI- X3.28-2.5-A4.............................................................................................................................115
8.4 Setting the parameters for the communication ........................................................................................................115
8.5 The Read command .................................................................................................................................................116
8.6 The Write command .................................................................................................................................................116
8.7 Use of the serial interface.........................................................................................................................................119
8.8 Use ANSI- X3.28-2.5-A4 connected to P.C. through RS232 ...................................................................................120
APPENDIX A: Mechanical sizes and wiring diagrams
A.1
Mechanical sizes ......................................................................................................................................................121
A.2
Wiring diagrams .......................................................................................................................................................126
APPENDIX B: System block diagram ....................................................................................................................................131
APPENDIX C: PC-TOOL ...............................................................................................................................................................141
APPENDIX D:OZONIZER .............................................................................................................................................................145
APPENDIX E:PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................................................................................151
Answer Drives S.r.l. is not responsible for technical or editing omissions in the present manual, neither it cannot be considered
responsible for incidental or consequential damages due to the use of the information included in the manual.
II IMGT10002EN
1 PREFACE
This manual provides detailed information and the safety rules concerning the installation and startup, use and maintenance of the inverters
series GT1000.
The manual has been written for Specialized operators involved in the installation, assembly, startup and maintenance of inverters GT1000,
and it has three different safety typologies, indicated by the specific symbols to identify information requiring special attention:
CAUTION! Indicates an incorrect action which may determine dangerous situations for the operators.
Furthermore, it warns the personnel about possible dangers which may occur during the
maintenance operations.
Dangerous Voltage It signals the presence of high voltages with the subsequent risk of death
or electric shock for the operators.
It indicates the situations which may endanger the safety of people and/or damage the
equipment.
WARNING It indicates a procedure which should be performed or avoided to perform in a correct way
operations of installation, repairing or replacement without damaging the inverter.
It indicates operations in whose field electrostatic discharges must be avoided.
☞ Generic WARNING symbol.
REMARK It is used to explain an instruction, an operation of repairing or other.
3 Generic REMARK symbol.
Documentation Structure
The documentation of the GT1000 includes also the following manuals:
MANUAL IMGT10001EN
APPLICATION NOTES NaxxGTxx
CAUTION!
Make sure you fully read and understand this MANUAL before performing any intervention on the GT1000.
IMGT10002EN-September 06 1
Safety precautions GT1000
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section contains information about safety necessary and useful for the personnel operating with the GT1000. The information is general
and concerns the risks, for operators or for maintenance personnel, related to the operation and maintenance of the inverter. The lack of
observance of these rules may cause an hazard to the safety of people, with risk of death and of damaging the inverter, motor or
operating machine.
Before operating with the unit, read the safety instructions.
CAUTION! All the operations of electric maintenance and installation on the GT1000 must be performed by qualified
technicians.
All the standard electric safety procedures must be respected:
• Never touch inside the inverter; only after making sure there is not a high temperature and/or in voltage.
• Always wear protection shoes insulated, in rubber and protection glasses.
• Never work alone.
• Never connect to the system any grounded device of measurement or oscilloscope.
• Never remove safety screens.
• Always pay maximum attention when handling components or performing measurements inside the panel.
DANGER!
• The GT1000 and all the other devices connected MUST BE GROUNDED IN A SUITABLE WAY.
• The voltages on the terminals of output of the GT1000 are dangerous, be it when the inverter is activated, be it when the same is
not operating. Also consider that the motor may turn in any moment as soon as the power supply is connected and the battery of the
capacitors is charged.
• If the inverter is installed in the panel, never operate it with the doors of the panel open.
DANGER! RISK OF FIRE, SERIOUS DAMAGE!

• The converter has not internal fuses; foresee suitable fuses (see Chapter 3A for caliper and type immediately upstream the
inverter. Do not use fuses different from those specified; wrong fuses may cause fire, serious damage to personnel equipment and/or
parts connected nearby. Some units need auxiliary fuses for the separated lines related to the fans and auxiliary circuits.
• Do not apply power to the inverter if you presume that inside of the container or of the components humidity has penetrated, dust or
caustic/corrosive chemical agents.
DANGER! RISK OF FIRE, SERIOUS DAMAGE OR INJURIES!

• GT1000 are devices of open type and must be installed strictly according to the instructions of this MANUAL and in total agreement
with the standards and rules in force.
• Never store flammable material inside, over or near the inverter.
IT IS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN TO
• Operate the inverter with voltage greater then the 10% of the rated value.
WARNING • Apply power to the terminals of output of the GT1000.
• Connect GT1000 in parallel, directly on the terminals in output
• Connect capacitive loads to the terminals in output of the GT1000
• Connect the input of the inverter to the output (Bypass)
• If the inverter is not supplied within two years, it may be necessary to format again the electrolytic capacitors.
Do so by supplying the GT1000 not enabled (Drive Enable open) for at least two hours.
DANGER! RISK OF DEATH OR ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Before performing maintenance on the unit, strictly follow these safety points:
DANGER • Perform the procedure of block/exclusion of electric power supply and open the main
disconnecting switch of the panel.
• Make sure that all the power supplies which reach the GT1000 (main and auxiliary power supply)
are disconnected before performing maintenance on the inverter.
• Await at least ten (10) minutes after disconnecting power supply before performing
maintenance on the unit. Before accessing to the terminals of the motor, make sure that the
capacitors of the bus DC are discharged: verifying with a multimeter calibrated for 1000Vdc or
greater that the voltage DC is lower than 40V. Refer to the safety plate existing on all the
inverters.
• Terminals of output of the braking switch show dangerous voltages in dc (greater than 500V)
• The GT1000 is supplied with many automatic functions of reset and restart which can restart
automatically the unit. Do not activate these functions if there are dangerous situations.
• Do not change the distances of insulation, nor remove materials and insulation covers.
2 IMGT10002EN-September 06
GT1000 Safety precautions
• The GT1000 supplies a control by variable frequency. The motors and loads must be in a position to
operate in the field of speed and power supplied by the inverter.
• Coordinate the voltage and the rated current of the motor and the inverter. The rated voltage of the
motor must be greater than 1/2 of the voltage of input and the rated current of the motor must be
greater than 1/3 of the current in output of the GT1000.
• The GT1000, independently from the frequency of output, produces a voltage of output by impulses
with a peak value of about 1.4 times the voltage AC of input and with uprise times very short. The
voltage of these impulses can almost double, according to the characteristics of the cable, on the
terminals of the motor: make sure that the cables of output and the motor insulation are projected to
resist to additional stresses.
• If you must perform some insulation tests on the motor and on the cables, first disconnect the cables
from the inverter. Do not perform on the components of the GT1000 of the test by high potential.
• Pay attention not to damage any part of the GT1000 during the movement.
• Protect the inverter from atmospheric agents and adverse environmental conditions (temperature,
humidity, vibrations, collisions, etc). If you must store temporarily the inverter outside, take special
precautions (see Chapter 2).
The GT1000 contains components sensitive to the electrostatic charges; such components may be
CAUTION! damaged if handles in a non suitable way. During the operations of maintenance or replacement of the
electronic cards, follow the points indicated here below:
Use a kit of maintenance for the electrostatic charges. You must take suitable precautions against the
electrostatic discharge (ESD):
Wear static belts suitably grounded.
Handle the cards from the edges.
The cards should not enter in contact with highly insulating materials as plastic sheets, insulating
surfaces, parts of synthetic tissues.
The cards shall be located on conductive surfaces only
The cards must be packed in conductive sheets before the shipment.
Warranty and limitsof liability

WARRANTY: for the conditions of warranty please refer to the module “GENERAL CONDITIONS OF WARRANTY” enclosed to the Order
Acceptation:
LIMITS OF LIABILITY: Answer Drives S.r.l shall not be considered liable for missing technical information or errors in this manual,
nor for accidental damages due to the use of the information contained in this manual.
Safety precautions GT1000
2 RECEPTION AND STORAGE
The models GT1000 have been designed for a wide range of applications and allow a constant adjustment of the motor speed. These
inverters are externally compact, reliable, advantageous in terms of costs, efficient, simple to use, and available for a wide range of three-
phase motors. The digital control at the state-of-the-art allows wide programming options.
The models GT1000 are suitable for single applications and in multi-motor with AC motors. Among the possible examples we have:
• pumps – centrifugal, volumetric, proportional
• fans – forced and aspirating, centrifugal, axial, evaporators
• mixers
• conveyor belts and packing machines
• winders – film, paper, cable
• centrifuges
• extruders – pumps for green convection, palletizers
• compressors
• machines for paper industry, steel, textile
• elevators, lifters, cranes and loaders
2.1 Reception, unload, unpacking and inspection of the inverter
All inverters are inspected and testes completely before the packing and upon the shipment from the premises. Upon reception, the equipment
must be inspected in order to detect any visible sign of damage occurred during transport. It is necessary to carefully verify the materials lists
to ensure you have received all components, including representations of profile and diagrams. If some part is damaged or missing, the
purchaser must submit immediately a complaint to the carrier and provide an information to the manufacturer.
After performing the initial inspections, the equipment must be transported quickly in the position of final installation or in a suitable storage
area1. When you move or lift the units, pay attention not to squeeze or shake the system. It is necessary to protect all metallic surfaces to
avoid they are damaged.
2.1.1 Unpacking sizes I, II, III, IIIX, IIIL
2.1.2 Unpacking sizes IV, V, VI
1
If the drive is delivered on a pallet, use a suitable fork lift truck.
Reception and Storage GT1000
2.1.3 Unpacking size VII
2.2 Storage
After the starting inspection, the device must be immediately transported in its position of final installation or in a dry storage area, protected
against atmospheric agents and with controlled temperature. Even though each inverter is suitably protected against environmental and
atmospheric conditions, there are environmental situations which may reduce its performances and also its life. The inverter is not
waterproof and must never be stored outdoors.
Here below we indicate the rated environmental conditions. The operator should consult the manufacturer for any doubt which may arise in
special places.
REMARK: Store each protection package until the installation and the startup have been achieved.
GT1000 Technical data
2.3 Technical data

2.3.1 Identification Mark
The product GT1000 is identified by a mark composed as follows:
1,2,3,4 5,6,7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14,15
S1GT 066 F B N F N N XX
Product family
Rated power in kVA (See table of electric data)
Input voltage F = 380 – 480 VAC
G = 500 VAC
Y = 510 – 650 VDC
Z = 675 VDC
Control card N = Not installed
B = Basic control
Dynamic braking N = Not installed
B = Installed
Filter RFI N = Not installed
F = Installed
Keypad N = Not installed
B = Basic functions
Communication N = Not installed
P = Profibus
Suffix 80 = GEDEA board installed
2.3.2 Electric Data Plate
2 3
4 5 1. Type of inverter
2. Serial number
6 7
3. Test date
4. Input voltage
5. Input frequency
6. Input current
7. Maximum symmetrical current of short circuit
8. Rated power [kVA]
9. Motor power kW-VT (@400V)
8 10. Motor power HP-VT (@460V)
11. Output current
12. Product code
13. Barcode
9 10
11
12
13
Figure 2.3.2 Electric data plate
Technical data GT1000
2.3.3 Environmental conditions admitted
Table 2-1 Admitted environmental conditions

Operation
Operation: operate in a stable place and protected against atmospheric conditions as in CEI 721-3-3.
Ambient temperature From 0 to 40 °C. (From 32 to 104 °F) – If ambient temperature exceeds + 40°C (104 °F), reduce the
output rated current by 1% for every °C (max. 55°C – max. 131°F ).
Relative humidity From 5 to 95% without condensate.
Contamination levels (Cards without covering) – Chemical gases: CEI 721-3-3, Class 3C2
- Solid parts: CEI 721-3-3, Class 32C
Altitude Up to 1000m (3280 ft) on level sea. Besides 1000m (3280 ft) on level sea, the output rated current is
reduced by 1% per each additional 100m (328 ft). Maximum 3000m (9840 ft)
Vibrations Max. 0.3 mm (from 2 to 9 Hz), max. 1 m/s2 (from 9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal (Class 3 M1).
Environmental • Avoid exposure to corrosive gases – including sulphurised hydrogen.
considerations • Avoid exposure to strong magnetic fields, nuclear radiations and high levels of RFI from
communication transmitters.
Transport
Transport: Transport the inverter in its protection packing according to CEI 721.3.2.
Ambient temperature From -25 to +70 °C. (From -13°F to +158°F)
Relative humidity Max. 95% at 40 °C. – Max. 95% at 104 °F.
Atmospheric pressure From 60 to 106 kPa
Vibrations Max 3.5 mm (from 2 to 9 Hz), max. 10m/s2 (from 9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal (class 2M1).
Shock max 100 m/s2, 11 ms. (max. 328 m/s2, 11 ms.)
Free drop 250 mm, 0,82 ft (weight lower than 100 kg)
100 mm, 0,33 ft (weigh greater than 100 kg)
Storage
Storage: Store in a protective packing and in an environment protected according to CEI 721-3-1.
Ambient temperature From -40°C to +70°C (From -40°F to +158°F)
Relative humidity From 5 to 95%, without conditions of condense or frost (class 1K3)
Altitude Up to 3300 feet (or 1000 meters)
Atmospheric pressure From 70 to106 kPa
Vibrations Max 1.5 mm (from 2 to 9 Hz), max. 5 m/s2 (from 9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal (class 1M3)
Shock Max. 100 m/s2, 11 ms (class 1M3).
Contamination levels Card without covering – Chemical gases: CEI 721-3-3, class 3C2
- Solid parts: CEI 721-3-3, class 32C
Environmental • Avoid exposure to corrosive gases – including sulphurised hydrogen.
considerations • Avoid exposure to strong magnetic fields, nuclear radiations and high levels of RFI from
communication transmitters
2.3.4 Electric Data
Table 2.2. Electric Data

S1GT Output current Max Current 4 poles motor @400 VAC 4 poles motor @460 VAC Current Derating
Type Frame IN (@ FS 3Kz) IMAX1 PN IM IMAX/ IM PN1 IM1 IMAX/ IM1 Bus DC @6 @9 @12
A A kW A HP A A KHz KHz KHz
S1GT0P3F I 3,8 5,7 1,5 3,6 1,58 2 3,4 1,68 4,5 1 1 0,9
S1GT0P4F I 5,6 8,4 2,2 5 1,68 3 4,8 1,75 6,6 1 0,89 0,75
S1GT0P6F I 9,5 14,2 4 8,6 1,65 5 7,6 1,87 11,2 1 1 0,93
S1GT008F II 12 18 5,5 11,5 1,57 7,5 11 1,64 14,2 1 0,9 0,81
S1GT011F III 16 24 7,5 15,5 1,55 10 14 1,71 18,9 0,98 0,8 0,66
S1GT015F III 21 31,5 9,2 18,4 1,71 15 20 1,58 24,8 0,74 0,6 0,5
S1GT018F IIIX 25 37,5 11 22,5 1,67 15 20 1,58 24,8 0,9 0,73 0,61
S1GT022F IIIX 32 48 15 30,2 1,59 20 27 1,78 37,8 0,9 0,73 0,61
S1GT028F IIIL 40 60 18,5 37 1,62 30 40 1,50 46,8 0,84 0,70 0,58
S1GT030F IIIN 40 56 18,5 37 1,51 30 40 1,40 46,8 0,84 0,70 0,58
S1GT036F IIIN 48 67 22 43 1,56 35 46 1,46 56,2 0,75 0,55 0,42
S1GT045F/Y IVN 61 92 30 58 1,59 40 52 1,77 71,4 0,75 0,55 0,42
S1GT053F/Y IVN 76 84 37 69 1,22 50 65 1,29 88,9 0,75 0,55 0,42
S1GT066F/Y IVN 90 126 45 84 1,50 60 77 1,64 105,3 0,75 0,55 0,42
S1GT086F/Y VN 110 143 55 100 1,43 75 96 1,49 127,6 no no no
S1GT108F/Y VN 145 160 75 135 1,19 100 124 1,29 168,2 no no no
S1GT125F/Y VIN 176 211 90 160 1,32 125 156 1,35 204,2 no no no
S1GT150F/Y VIN 210 265 110 195 1,36 150 180 1,47 243,6 no no no
S1GT182F/Y VII 260 286 132 239 1,2 200 226 1,3 302 no/ no/ no
S1GT216F/Y VII 335 368 160 288 1,3 250 290 1,3 389 no/ no no
S1GT258F/Y VII 400 440 200 355 1,2 300 350 1,3 464 no no no
1. The maximum input current is about 90% of the output current.
2. It is supplied a protection for overcurrent for a motor and the Bus DC.
3. S1GTxxxY (DC Bus connection) has the same value of output current and rated power of a S1GTxxxF
1 IMAX can be supplied for 1min with a duty cicle not repetitive.
2.3.5 Cooling
Please refer to the following table for the sizing of the protections:
Table 2.3.5. Data for ventilation
The S1GT (except S1GT0P3/0P4/003/004) are equipped with an internal fan. The air entrance comes from the bottom.
Inverter Output current Power losses Ventilation Ventilator Rated Data

Power Control Capacity Voltage Current
A W W m^3/h ft^3/s V A
Three-phase power supply voltage 380V, 415V, 440V, 460V, 480V ±10%
S1GT0P3F 3.8 45 30 NA NA NA NA
S1GT008F 12 165 30 66 36 NA NA
S1GT011F 16 225 30 100 59 NA NA
S1GT015F 21 276 30 100 59 NA NA
S1GT018F 25 276 30 100 59 NA NA
S1GT022F 32 450 30 100 59 NA NA
S1GT028F 40 555 40 100 59 NA NA
S1GT030F 40 555 40 100 59 NA NA
S1GT036F 48 660 40 100 59 NA NA
S1GT045F 61 900 50 280 164 NA NA
S1GT053F 76 1100 50 280 164 NA NA
S1GT066F 90 1350 50 280 164 NA NA
S1GT086F 110 1650 60 280 164 NA NA
S1GT108F 145 2250 60 280 164 NA NA
S1GT125F 176 2700 60 500 293 230V 50/60Hz 1PH 0,9 (*)
S1GT150F 210 3300 80 500 293 230V 50/60Hz 1PH 0,9 (*)
S1GT182F 260 3960 80 800 471 230V 50/60Hz 1PH 1.45
S1GT216F 310 4800 100 800 471 230V 50/60Hz 1PH 1.45
S1GT258F 370 6000 100 800 471 230V 50/60Hz 1PH 1.45
WARNING The fans of the GT1000 are sized to support the load losses of the inverter only. During the installation on
the panel, it is necessary to consider also the load losses due to abduction channels and filters.
☞ The additional load losses must be compensated by the system of ventilation of the panel.
2.3.6 Overall dimensions and weights
See Appendix A.
10 IMGT10002EN-October 06
2.4 Standards
IEC 146-1-1 Converters by semiconductors. General instructions and converters by natural commutation.
Part 1-1: Specification of basic requirements.
IEC 146-1-2 Converters by semiconductors. General instructions and converters by natural commutation.
Part 1-2: Guide to the application.
IEC 146-2 Converters by semiconductors.
Part 2: converters to forced commutation.
IEC 664-1 Coordination of insulation for the elements connected to the network of power supply, low voltage.
Part 1: Principles, instructions and test.
IEC 22G/24/CDV Power electronics.
Power converters by semiconductors for inverters with adjustable speed.
Part 1: Inverters by variable frequency, low voltage, for general use of AC motors.
EN 60204-1 Safety on machines. Electric components of machines.
Part 1: General rules.
EN 60204-1 Electric components of industrial machines.
Modification 1 Part 2: Use of components and examples of drawings, diagrams, tables and instructions.
IEC 529 Protection degrees of the enclosures (Code IP)
EN 50178 Electronic equipment for the use in power installations.

IEC 1800-3 Immunity, conduction and radiation of emissions.
CE marking
On the models GT1000 there is the CE mark to prove that the product is complying to the European
Community Directive 2006/95/EC called "Low Voltage" and to Directive 89/336/CEE amended by
Directive 93/68/EEC called "EMC" Directive.
The validity of CE mark for EMCs is subject to the use of models GT3000 according to the recommendations of this
manual.
UL Certification
The models GT1000 are certified for USA and Canada markets.
The file number of Answer Drives S.r.l. is: E226584

The model GT1000 complies with the conditions of UL certification if the following prescriptions are observed.
1. Use cables or copper bars in Class 1 65 / 75°C (140/167°F) with the section recalled in this manual according to the
size of the inverter.
2. The capacities of the power supply network must not be greater than:
5KA rms symmetric, 480V” for models from S1GT0P3F to S1GT028F
10KA rms symmetric 480V for models from S1GT029F to S1GT150F
18KA rms symmetric 480V for models from S1GT182F to S1GT258F
3. The tightening torque and the section of cables related to the terminals are indicated on chapter 3.
4. The caliper of distribution fuses is indicated on chapter 3.
5. The connections of cables must be performed with eyebolt cable lugs marked UL and certified CSA. The cable lugs
must be fixed through the clamp indicated by the manufacturer.
For the type of cable lugs, please see chapter 3.
6. The GT1000 foresees the protection of motor overload which can be calibrated between 30% and 105% of the
motor rated current at full load. For the information concerning the calibration of the intervention thresholds on the
overload time, etc., please see chapter 7B paragraph 7B.
7. The GT1000 foresees the static protection of overcurrent at the output of the inverter and shortcircuit on the side
DC.
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Mechanical Installation
• Do not mount the inverter on surfaces undergoing vibrations.

• The installation environment must have no dust, metallic particles, oil in suspension, gas and sprays of corrosive liquids.
• The inverter is manufactured for wall mounting. It must always be installed in vertical position. Do not mount the unit with an inclination
greater than + 30% compared to the vertical.
• If it is installed more than one inverter in the same frame, place the inverters side by side. Avoid to mount a unit over the other one. If a
unit is installed above another it necessary to lead the out-coming cooling air away from the unit above.
• Prevent hot air recirculation outside the cabinet by leading the out coming hot air away from the area where the inlet air to the cabinet is
taken. Possible solutions are: gratings that guide air flow at the air inlet and outlet, air inlet and outlet at different sides of the cabinet, cool
air inlet in the lower part of the front door, and an extra exhaust fan on the roof of the cabinet.
• Prevent hot air circulation inside the cabinet with leak-proof air baffles.
• The cooling of the power components of the inverter is performed through forced ventilation. It is necessary to foresee a space of respect
around the inverter for the air circulation, the passage of electric cables and for the access in case of maintenance interventions.
HIGH
Air outlet Size A B1 B2
mm / in mm /in mm / in
I - II 25 / 1 100 / 3.9 100 / 3.9

B1
III - IIIL - IIIX 50 / 2 100 / 3.9 100 / 3.9

IIIN-IVN 50 / 2 100 / 3.9 100 / 3.9
VN 50 / 2 100 / 3.9 200 / 7.8
DIMENSIONI
INVERTER
VIN 100 / 3.9 100 / 3.9 200 / 7.8
(senza supporti VII 50 / 2 100 / 3.9 300 / 11.8
di montaggio)
CAUTION!
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR
ON Fault RUN
STOP MAN AUTO RESET
Enter
Canc.
The fans of the GT1000 are sized in order to supply a suitable air flow for the inverter
SHIFT
cooling. Do not obstruct the passage of the air flow when you install the unit.
Ingresso Ingresso
Aria Basso Aria
B2
A A
LOW
Air inlet
Figure 3.1 Inverter Size
NOTE For IP54 version ask to “Application department”.
IMGT10002EN 13
Installation GT1000
3.1.1 Assembly
Please refer to the following figures as for the assembly of the inverter.
Frames I - III
Assembly holes
To remove
the cover
Frames III, IV, VN
Door Screws
To open the
door, unscrew
the screws
14 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
Frames VII
Cover Screws
for Blue Cover
Cover Screws for
White Cover
IMGT10002EN 15
Installation GT1000
3.2 Electric Installation
The interventions of electric maintenance and installation on GT1000 must be performed by qualified
technicians.
It is compulsory to follow all standard safety procedures of electric safety:
• Do not touch anything inside the inverter without before verifying that it is not thermically hot or
CAUTION! electrically power supplied.
• Always wear insulating safety shoes and protection glasses.
• Never work alone.
• Never connect to the system voltmeters and oscilloscopes grounded.
• Never remove the safety protections.
• Always pay great attention when using components or performing measures inside the installation
panel.
The drive has not internal fuses of protection on the main part of power. It is necessary to foresee suitable
fuses immediately upstream the inverter. See table 3.2 for the selection of the fuses.
DANGER! RISK OF FIRE, SERIOUS DAMAGES OR INJURIES! Never use fuses different from those
indicated or operate the inverters without fuses of line. Wrong fuses can cause fire, serious damages to the
equipment and/or parts connected nearby, and also possible injuries. Some units (see table 3.2) require
different fuses of line for the fans and/or auxiliary circuits.
Never provide power supply to the inverter if humidity, dust pr chemical products, caustic/corrosive may
have penetrated inside the cubicle or the internal devices.
DANGER! RISK OF FIRE, SERIOUS DAMAGES OR INJURIES! The inverters GT1000 are devices of type
‘’open’’and must be installed forcedly according to the instructions of the USER’S MANUAL, in the full
respect of the standards and rules in force.
DANGER! I GT1000 and all the devices connected MUST BE SUITABLY CONNECTED TO THE
GROUND .
DANGER! RISK OF DEATH O OR ELECTRIC SHOCK ! It is necessary to adopt forcedly the following
safety measures, before performing maintenance operations on the unit:
Perform the procedure of block/exclusion of all electric power supplies and open the main disconnecting
switch of the inverter.
Do not modify the distances of insulation of the material and of the covers removed.
If you must perform test of insulation on the motor and on the cables, before proceeding, first disconnect
the cables from the inverter. Do not perform tests on high voltage on the components of the inverter.
Do not provide power supply to the output terminals.
WARNING
The inverter contains components sensitive to electrostatic discharges; such components may damage if
incorrectly handled. During interventions of replacement or maintenance of the electronic boards, it is
necessary to observe the following procedure:
Use the kit of maintenance for electrostatic charges. It Is necessary to adopt precautions against the
electrostatic charges (ESD):
Wear antistatic rings suitably connected to the ground.
Handle the PC boards from the edges.
16 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.2.1 Diagram of connections for power and control
SIGT0P3-028 SIGT030-150
DISCONNECTING
SWITCH DISCONNECTING
SWITCH
LINE FUSES
BRAKING LINE FUSES
RESISTOR
KIN
BRAKING KIN
INPUT TH
RESISTOR FU
REACTOR
TH
INPUT
REACTOR
OPTION
OUTPUT OUTPUT
REACTOR REACTOR
Figure 3.2.1 Diagram of power connections
The connections of the terminals of the auxiliary power supplies and the connections of the terminals of the
REMARK board of control are shown in the figure indicated on Chapter 3 and in Appendix A.
• As a replacement of the disconnecting switch and fuses, it is possible to use a magnetothermal automatic
WARNING switch with rated current ≥ 1.2*Im and a calibration of adjustable short circuit from 5 to 10*In with reference to
the rated value of the switch.
• In case of use of an external protection of ground , use a few sensitive device to high frequency in order to
avoid false interventions. The current of threshold should be greater than 200mA and the time of trigger
must be at least 0.1s.
IMGT10002EN 17
Installation GT1000
L1
L2
L3
PE
KIN
NETWORK
TH
FU
BRAKING
RESIATOR
X3
KEYPAD
REACTOR
1 OPTIONAL
0 1
INPUT
2 RL1 FAULT PROFIBUS DP
3 BOARD
SIN RL2 PROG
4
PEM 5
6
FW
RV REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR
GT1000
LOGIC INPUTS
7 COM1
TH 8 COM2 S1GT125FBBFBN
9 COM3 ON Fault RUN
10 DREN
KIN 11 24V
STOP MAN AUTO RESET
Enter
12 Canc.
DI/DO GND
+10V
ANALOG INPUTS
13
GEDEA BOARD (OPTION)
14 AI 1 + SHIFT
15 AI 1 - ENCODER INPUTS
16 AI 2 +
ANALOG OUTPUTS
GROUND
17
AI/AO GROUND
RL3
RL4
18 AO 1
5V
A
A
19
B
B
GROUND
A1
20 B-RS485
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
21 A-RS485
OUTPUT
START FW/STOP REACTOR
MAN STOP
START RV/STOP
MAN STOP
MOTOPOT
Figure 3.2.2 Connection example
18 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.2.2 Cables of power supply, fuses of power supply and auxiliaries

3.2.2.1 Cables of power supply e fuses of power supply
The cables and the fuses of power supply must be chosen according to the following tables. It is necessary to use cables of input power
supply and motor cables with rated values 600-690VAC. Use a cable with rated values 1000VDC for the connections of the dynamic brake.
Table 3.2 Sizing of the cables and of the fuses of power supply (380-460 V AC; 510-650 V DC)
F = Voltage of power supply three-phase 380V, 400V, 440V, 460V, 480V /Y=510-650Vdc ±10%
Model power Main Fuses Section of cables Terminals Cable lugs Max. Max. Current
supply * Type ** torque of c.to c.to line
[A] (UL) AWG mm2 NA Nm / in lb KA
S1GT0P3F A.C. 5x3 FWP-15A 14 2,5 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT0P3F C.C. 5x2 FWP-15A 14 2,5 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT0P4F A.C. 10 x3 FWP-15A 14 2,5 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT004F A.C. 10 x3 FWP-15A 14 2,5 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT004F C.C. 10x2 FWP-15A 14 2,5 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT0P6F A.C. 10 x3 FWP-20A 14 2,5 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT011F A.C. 20 x3 FWH-40A 12 4 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT011F C.C. 25x2 FWP-40A 12 4 10 (AWG max) NA 0,5-0,6 5
S1GT036F A.C. 60 x3 FWH-100A 6 16 4(AWG max) NA 2 5
S1GT036F C.C. 80x2 FWP-125A 6 16 4(AWG max) NA 2 5
S1GT045F A.C. 70 x3 FWH-150A 4 25 0(AWG max) NA 2,5 10
S1GT045Y C.C. 90x2 FWP-125A 4 25 0(AWG max) NA 2,5 10
Input Output
S1GT086F A.C. 125 x3 FWH-225A 1/0 50 M6 M8 2x2xELC23025111 10 10
S1GT086Y C.C. 175x2 FWP-225A 1/0 50 M6 M8 2x3xELC23025111 10 10
S1GT182F A.C. 300x3 FWH-350 2x2/0 120 3x2-M10 2xELC23025111 12,5 18
S1GT182Y C.C. 450x2 FWP-450A 2x2/0 150 2x2-M10 2xELC23025111 12,5 18
S1GT216F A.C. 350x3 FWH-400A 2x3/0 150 3x2-M10 2xELC23025111 12,5 18
S1GT216Y C.C. 600x2 FWP-600A 2x3/0 150 2x2-M10 2xELC23025111 12,5 18
S1GT258F A.C. 450x3 FWH-450A 2x4/0 2x95 3x2-M10 2xELC23025111 12,5 18
S1GT258Y C.C. 700x2 FWP-700A 3x2/0 2x95 2x2-M10 3xELC23025111 12,5 18
*For the market CE one can use normal fuses gG sized with value of current equal to: 1,3 times the rated
current of the GT1000 for power supply in ca
WARNING **The section of the cables indicated in table is indicative. Please refer to the local wiring rules for the correct
sizing of the cables. In some cases it may be required a greater section to avoid excessive voltage drops.
19 IMGT10002EN
Installation GT1000
3.3 MANDATORY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION ACCORDING TO THE EMC DIRECTIVE

3.3.1 EN61800-3 EMC product standard for adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
EN 61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electrical drive systems. Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods. The transition
period for the existing EN 61800-3:1996 expires on 1st October 2007.
The EN 61800-3 includes the electrical power drive system from the mains connection to the shaft of the motor, defines different categories C1
to C4, different environments (residential areas/industrial areas), external ports and internal interfaces.
It defines assessment criteria for the operational performance in case of interference at the external ports and the internal interfaces according
to the environment at the installation site.
3.3.1.1 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT (Definitions)
First environment (residential and commercial areas):
Environment that includes domestic premises. It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low-
voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment (industrial area):
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
NOTE “For PDS’s in the second environment, the user shall ensure that excessive disturbances are not induced into low-voltage network,
even if propagation is through a medium voltage network.”
Private network
The private network is characterised by being supplied by a dedicated medium voltage network and not supplying residential areas. Typically,
the private main supplies commercial premises, offices in a residential building, shopping centres, etc. The operator can decide whether he
realises the network according to the first or second environment as defined by the standard.
A private low-voltage network can be regarded as a plant in compliance with the EMC law. The EMC is assessed according to the physical
limits of the plant, emission and immunity to radiated RF-fields are assessed according to the space limits and
conducted phenomena are assessed according to the input to the supplying network
3.3.1.2 EN 61 800-3 Categories
Category C1: Drive systems for rated voltages less than 1000 V for unlimited use in the first environment.
Category C2: Stationary drive systems for rated voltages less than 1000 V for use in the second environment. It is possible the use in the
first environment which fulfil all the following criteria:
Rated voltage < 1000 V
no plug-in device
no movable device
Installation and commissioning only by a professional (a person/organisation having necessary skills in installing and/or
commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects)
Warning required.
Warning in the instructions for use:
“This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800-3. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.”
Category C3: Drive systems with rated voltage < 1000 V, intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first
environment.
Warning in the instructions for use:
“This type of PDS is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio
frequency interference is expected if used on such a network”.
Category C4: for use in the second environment, which fulfil at least one of the following criteria:
Rated voltage ≥1000 V
Rated current ≥400 A
connected to IT networks
required dynamic performances will be limited as a result of filtering
An EMC plan is to be established!
Classification of categories according to environments
20 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.3.1 Solutions to fulfil conducted emission requirements

Some basic principles have to be followed when designing and using drive systems incorporating AC drive products.
The emissions can be divided into two parts, the conducted emission and the radiated emission.
The disturbances can be emitted in various ways. Conducted disturbances can propagate to other equipment via all conductive parts including
cabling, earthing and the metal frame of an enclosure.
Conducted emission: Can be reduced in the following way:
By RFI filtering for HF disturbances
Using sparking suppressors in relays, contactors, valves, etc. to attenuate switching sparks
Using ferrite rings in power connection points
Radiated emission: To be able to avoid disturbance through air, all parts of the PDS should form a Faraday Cage against radiated
emissions. The PDS includes cabinets, auxiliary boxes, cabling, motors, etc. Some methods for ensuring the
continuity of the Faraday Cage are listed as follows:
Enclosure:
• The enclosure must have an unpainted non-corroding surface finish at every point that other plates, doors, etc. make contact.
• Unpainted metal to metal contacts shall be used throughout, with conductive gaskets, where appropriate.
• Use unpainted installation plates, bonded to common earth point, ensuring all separate metal items are firmly bonded to achieve a single
path to earth
• Use conductive gaskets in doors and covers. Covers should be secured at not more than 100 mm intervals where radiation could escape.
• Separate radiative i.e. “dirty” side from the “clean side” by metal covers and design.
• Holes in enclosure should be minimised.
• Use materials with good attenuation e.g. plastic with conductive coating, if a metal enclosure cannot be used.
Cabling & Wiring:
• Use special HF cable entries for high frequency earthing of power cable shields.
• Use conductive gaskets for HF earthing of control cable shield.
• Use shielded power and control cables.
• Route power and control cables separately.
• Use twisted pairs to avoid common mode disturbances.
• Use ferrite rings for common mode disturbances, if necessary.
• Select and route internal wires correctly.
Installation:
• Auxiliaries used with CDM’s should be CE marked products to both EMC & Low Voltage Directives, not only to LV directive, unless they
are not concerned, e.g. being with a component without a direct function.
• Selection and installation of accessories in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions
• 360° earthing at motor end.
• Correct internal wiring methods.
• Special attention must be given to earthing.
3.3.2 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI) FILTER

The EMC emission limits for PDS depend on the installation environment, type of power supply network and power of the drive.
RFI filters are used to attenuate conducted disturbances in a line connecting point where the filter leads the disturbances to earth.
RFI filters are needed when a PDS is connected to the public low-voltage network (First Environment).
It is also recommended to use filters in industrial situations (Second Environment), if there are potential victims in the neighbourhood and thus
possible EMC problems.
Installation of the RFI filter: Reliable HF/low impedance connections are essential to ensure proper functioning of the filter, therefore the
following instructions shall be followed.
• Filter shall be assembled on a metal plate with unpainted connection points all in accordance with filter manufacturer’s instructions.
• The frames of the filter cubicle (if separate) and the drive cubicle shall be bolted together at several points. Paint shall be removed from all
connection points.
• The input and output cables of the filter shall not run in parallel, and must be separated from each other.
• The maximum length of the cable between the filter and the drive must be shorter than 0.3m; do not obstruct the drive cooling intake. For
longer connections use a shielded cable only..
• The filter must be earthed using the designated filter ground terminal only. Note that the cable type and size are critical.
Relays, contactors and magnetic valves must be equipped with spark suppressors. This is also necessary when these parts are mounted
outside the frequency converter cubicle.
IMGT10002EN 21
Installation GT1000
3.3.2.1 RFI FILTER (codes: see Table 3A.5)

RFI filter in a earthed line (TN or TT )Network:
The filters are suitable for earthed lines only, for example in public European 400 V lines. According to EN 61800-3, filters are not compatible
in insulated industrial lines with own supply transformers due to their safety risks in such floating lines (IT networks).
Earth fault detection:
Filters (with internal discharging resistors), cables, the converter and the motor have together a considerable capacitance to ground, which can
cause an increased leakage earth current (>30mA).
The tripping threshold of an earth fault detector that measures this current must be adapted to this higher value.
Floating Networks IT (ungrounded) systems:
For floating networks (known as IT, ungrounded or impedance/resistance grounded networks), if the drive is equipped with EMC filter:
• Disconnect the filter before connecting the drive to an ungrounded system.
• Where EMC requirements exist, check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks. In some cases, the natural
suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and
secondary windings.
S1GT0P3/0P4/0P6
For this drive the filter is

supplied loose with a kit
that includes an adaptor
for mounting the RFI filter
below the drive.
ON Fault RUN
STOP MAN AUTO RESET
Kit SAP code:

Enter
Canc.
1000007130. SHIFT
The filter shall be grounded before applying power and can be used with balanced supply mains only.
CAUTION! Do not attempt to install or remove RFI filter connections while power is applied to the drive’s input terminals
If a drive with EMC filter is installed on an IT system [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded
(>30Ω) power system], the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the
drive. This may cause danger or damage the unit.
The filter shall not be connected to the drive output (motor side).
Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks (defined in the following table)
In such networks, the RFI filter internal connection must be disconnected.
If the grounding configuration of the network is unknown, remove RFI filter internal connection.
Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks – RFI filter must be disconnected
Ground at the mid point of a leg Ground at the corner of the delta Three phase “Variac” without solidly grounded neutral
22 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.3.3 GT1000 COMPLIANCE WITH IEC 61800-3

The GT1000, with EMC filter, is a product of C3 and C4 categories and so complies with the limit values of the EN61800-3 for the second
enviroment.
The GT1000, with optional class B EMC filter and motor cable length less than 25m, can be considered a product of C2 category and so
complies with the reduced limit values for the first enviroment.
Warning: “This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800-3. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.”
The drive must be installed according to the instructions given in this Manual.
To reduce emissions GT1000-Large are equipped with EMC filter (installed inside the chassis, S1GT0P3-0P4-0P6 excluded).
Optional filters for use in the first enviroment are available on request.
Note: a) The drive must not be equipped with the EMC filter when installed to IT (unearthed) systems. The mains becomes
connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors. In IT systems this may cause danger or damage the unit.
b) Refer to Figure 3A 10 for filter connection to the drive. RFI filter codes are in Table 3A.6.3
NOTE
If the above listed provisions cannot be met, e.g., the drive cannot be equipped with EMC filter when installed to an IT (unearthed) network,
the requirements of the EMC Directive can be met as follows for restricted distribution:
1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-voltage networks. In some cases, the natural suppression in
transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings
can be used.
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation.

3. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual.
4. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual.
IMGT10002EN 23
Installation GT1000
3.3.4 MOTOR CABLE

3.3.4.1 Connection cables between inverter and motors
NOTE:The power motor cables must be shielded. If they are not shielded RFI or EMI problems may arise.)
Shielded cables assure a greater immunity of other users of the plant against the noise generated by the drive.and they returns high frequency
current directly to the drive through the shielding instead of the current flowing through the motor frame.
The cable shield must be continuous and must be connected to ground at both ends. both to the ground terminal of the motor, and to the
cabinet output terminal, connected at its turn to ground bars.
In general, always foresee the use of a dedicated cable – with minimum section of 50% of the phases – connecting directly the terminal PE of
the drive with the corresponding terminal of the motor. This cable has the function of supplying a preferential way of closure to bring back to
the drive the noises created by the same avoiding to spread them to the plant ground system.
The motor protection connection must be performed locally with the plant ground system.
Motor TB U
C ABLE
SH IELD
V
Figure 3A.5.4
Typical connection on the motor
W
3.3.4.2 TYPE OF CABLES BETWEEN INVERTER AND MOTORS
a) Suggested cable
Symmetrical Shielded cable:
- 3 phase conductors symmetrically arranged
- single phase non shielded conductors
- 3 PE conductors symmetrically arranged
- external global shielding for all phase and PE conductors
b) Suggested cable
Symmetrical shielded cable: as the previous one, but with a single PE
conductor located in the middle of the cable
c) Suggested cable
Symmetrical shielded cable: shielding with section greater than 50% of the
section of each phase conductor, therefore no further PE conductors are
necessary.
d) Not allowed cable

The use of these two types of cables is allowed only for S < 10mm².
e) Not allowed cable
f) Not allowed cable
24 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
Connections Inverter - Motor with symmetrical shielded cable
PANEL
(GT1000)
MOTOR
Connections – converter side:

a) The PE conductors and the shields must be connected to the ground bars of the converter panel.
b) If due to the current load it is necessary to use more parallel connected cables, the three conductors of each three-phase cable
must be connected to the phases U, V, and W.
Connections – motor side:
a) The PE conductors and the shields must be connected to the frame of the motor; therefore, on the terminal board of the motor it
must be foreseen a proper fastening plate.
b) Should it be necessary to use more parallel connected cables, the three conductors of each three-phase cable must be
connected to the phases U, V, and W.
NOTE: Long shielded motor cables may cause external ground fault detector trips, due to leakage currents to ground and high switching
frequency. Replace the external ground fault detector with a less sensitive one or feed the drive with an isolation transformer.
Grounding
The inverter panel and the motor are connected singularly to the same grounding system. The connection cables between Inverter and Motor
are grounded on both sides (both the PE conductors and the shields of these cables).
3.3.4.3 Cabling
The cables for digital signals which are longer than 3m and all cables for analogue signals must be screened. Each screen must be connected
at both ends by metals clamps or comparable means directly on clean metal surfaces, if both earthing points belong to the same earth line.
Otherwise a capacitor (10 nF-2 KV) must be connected to earth on one end.
In the converter cabinet this kind of connection must be made directly on the sheet metal as close as possible to the terminals and if the cable
comes from outside also on the PE bar. At the other end of the cable the screen must be well connected with the housing of the signal emitter
or receiver.
While grounding the shields of the cables, it is necessary to use a 360° connection and it is compulsory to avoid a pigtail connection. By pigtail
is meant the connection to earth ground of the cable shield by means of an additional wire.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable for analogue signals. This type of cable is recommended for the pulse encoder signals also. Employ
one individually shielded pair for each signal.
Do not use common return for
different analogue signals.
A double shielded twisted pair cable A single shielded twisted multipair cable
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but single-shielded twisted multipair cable is also usable.
Run analogue and digital signals in separate, shielded cables.
Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in the same cables as digital input signals. It is
recommended that the relay-controlled signals be run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 VDC and 115 / 230 VAC signals in the same cable.
Maximum section of the control cables: 1,5mm2 (AWG16)
Sezione massima dei cavi di controllo: 1,5mm2 (AWG16)
IMGT10002EN 25
Installation GT1000
• Control signal cables must be

kept at a distance greater than
0.3m (1 foot) from power cables.
Keep both power cables and
signal cables in separate
raceways.
If it is necessary to cross power
and signal cables, cross at a 90°
(right) angle.
Figure 3A.5.4.3 Cable Routing
3.3.4.4 GROUNDING
For personnel safety, proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission/pickup, the drive and the motor must be grounded at the
installation site. Every drive shall have its own ground. A star ground system is acceptable although it is not the preferred method.
• Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations.
• Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations.
• Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized
as required by safety regulations.
• In multiple drive installations, do not connect drive terminals in series.
• The panel must have a properly sized ground bus to which all system grounds are connected. The bus bar shall be connected to
plant ground.
• Ground connections must be as short as possible.
• The drive ground connection should not be shared with other devices.
• High frequency RFI requires large areas of ground bus (due to skin effect).
S1GT S1GT S1GT S1GT S1GT S1GT
PE PE PE PE PE PE
b) Acceptable connection
a) Preferred connection
Grounding terminal of the drive.

S1GT045/053/066F/Y
PE - L L L R R
1 2 3E E
+ -
Protection
Earth
Connection
CONTROL
BOARD
Motor Earth
U V WPE
26 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.4 REACTORS
3.4.1 Input reactors
The line reactor reduces the harmonic content of the input current of the inverter, improving the factor of input power and decouples the
equipment connected on the same line. The reactor causes a drop of voltage proportional to the current of power supply and to the value of
inductance. Select a reactor to have a drop of voltage equal to the 2÷5 % of the rated input voltage (when the inverter is performing the total
rated current). The codes of the input reactors are indicated in Table 3.4.
S1GT030-150F have an internal line reactor, for S1GT0P3-028 and S1GT182-258 foresee a reactor between the mains and the inverter if:
• on the same line are operating a converter by thyristors or other inverters.
• on the same line are connected rephasing capacitors.
• the unbalance of the voltage of power supply exceeds the 3%.
Example : Vrs = 400V, Vst = 407V, Vtr = 390V. Vrs, Vst, Vtr: value rms of the voltages line-to-line
Vrs + Vst + Vtr Vm: average value of Vrs, Vst, Vtr
VM = = 399V
3 Fs: unbalance of voltage
max. deviazione da VM 9
Fs = 100 ⋅ = 100 ⋅ = 2,3%
VM 399
In this example the reactor is not necessary
• the power of the line of power supply and the power of the inverter are included in the area highlighted:
[kVA] Power in power
supp. line
2500
React. necess. line
500
Not necess. Inverter Size
50 250 [kVA]
Figure 3.5. Input Reactor
3.4.2 Output reactor
The output reactors are necessary to compensate the current of capacitive dispersion to the ground, and they also reduce the gradient of
voltage on the motor and they, together with the ferrite cores, help RFI phenomena attenuation.
Output reactors codes are in table 3.4
USE OF OUTPUT REACTOR VS SHIELDED CABLES LENGTH
CAUTION: In case of motors in parallel, it is necessary to take into account the sum of the lenghts of all motor cables
Limit the length of the motor cables so as not to exceed a voltage drop of 3 ÷ 5 % at the rated current.
3.4.3 FERRITI
In the applications in wich various motors are connected to one inverter and it is not possible to carry
out the complete shielding of the cables because of a shunt terminal board of the single motor
(shielded) cables, it is necessary to provide toroids in the inverter output.
In order to use them correctly it is necessary to wind the three cables (from 2 up to 5 times) within the
core leaving the earth cable outside.
The part of cable from the inverter to the shunt terminal board, without braiding, shall be as short as
possible.
The GT1000 provides an internal mono-loop ferrite ring outcoming to motor.
IMGT10002EN 27
Installation GT1000
Table 3.4 Reactor of line, filters RFI and output reactors
Voltage of power supply three-phase 380V, 415V, 440V, 460V, 480V ±10%
Filters RFI Output Reactor
TYPE Line Reactor Class B Class A
Internal External Internal
S1GT0P3F ELC22386201 ELC40969901 ELC22306601
S1GT0P4F ELC22386201 ELC40969901 ELC22306601
S1GT0P6F ELC22386201 ELC40922302 ELC22306601
S1GT008F ELC22386201 ELC40969901 ELC40922302 ELC22306601
S1GT030F ELC40922305 ELC22306603
S1GT036F ELC22306603
S1GT045F ELC22306604
S1GT053F ELC22306604
S1GT066F ELC22306604
S1GT086F ELC22306604
S1GT108F ELC22306605
S1GT125F ELC22306605
S1GT150F ELC22306606
S1GT182F ELC22386210 ELC40821102 ELC22306606
S1GT216F ELC22386211 ELC40821107 ELC22306607
S1GT258F ELC22386212 ELC40821107 ELC22306609
28 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.5 Control Section
The control section is made of a series of interfaces and by a unit of processing by microcontroller. The control board receives and processes the
signals of motor current and voltage of the capacitors of filter and transmits six signals of command to the modules IGBT.
Through the keypad and a set of circuits of interface connected to the terminal control board, you access to the control of the drive.
3.5.1 Microprocessor control board

Board Description
K1
XM1: Control terminal board

XM2: I/O expansion terminal board
U16: microprocessor JP8
GSCMA
U25
U24: coprocessor
U26: FLASH memory
U28: EEProm
RL1, RL2: relay U27
JP7
X3: telephone connector

KE/KE1: Expansion board connector I/O U24
K4: networks board connector
K4
DL2 green
U26
DL1 red
DL3 jellow JP5
LED for the codification of the JP4
status of the drive (chap.7.2). U16
U28
DL2 X3
PS1 X5
DL1
JP1 DL4
JP6
KE1 JP2
KE JP9
RL1
RL2
JP3
RI1
XM1
Figure 3.11 Control board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 3.5.1 Shunts and switches of the basic board of control by microprocessor
JP1 ON Connects the possibility of the automatic reset of the protections Function
JP2 ON Brings at +10V (through 1KΩ) analog input to the terminal 14 Inputs
JP3 OFF Connects 475Ω for input 0-4/20mA on terminal 16 Inputs
JP9 OFF Connects 475Ω for input 0-4/20mA on the terminals 14-15 Inputs
JP6 1-2 The termination RS485 (Terminals 20-21) is closed on 221Ω Serial
3 2 1 3 2 1 2-3 The termination RS485 (Terminals 20-21) is open
JP8 1-2 Do not Remove Function
3 2 1 3 2 1 2-3
IMGT10002EN 29
Installation GT1000
Table 3.5.2 Terminal board of control
FUNCTION XM1 DESCRIPTION

Relay 1
RL1: contact relay DRIVE O.K 1A-220Vac-charged R.
2
Relay 3
RL2: contact relay configurable 1A-220Vac-charged R.
4
Start FW 5 FORWARD RUN (V/F) / RUN (FOC)
Start REV 6 REVERSE RUN (V/F) / FLOW (FOC)
COM1 7 Command configurable SW
DREN 10 Command Drive Enable (enabling)
24Vcc 11 100mA Power supply of digital Inputs
0V 12 I/O Digital inputs
+10V 13 +10Vdc 5mA power supply of potentiometer
+ Ean1 14 Configurable differential analog input 1: +/- 10V (terminal not inv.)
- Ean1 15 Configurable differential analog input1: +/- 10V (terminal inv.)
Ean2 16 Configurable analog input2: +/- 10V (4 -20mA)
0V 17 Common of analog inputs/outputs
Analog 1 18 Analog output 1 (0/10V)
0V 19 0V control
serial 20 B serial RS485
serial 21 A serial RS485
Table 3.5.3 Terminal board of expansion board in the encoder input (mounted inside the drive)
FUNCTION XM2 DESCRIPTION
1 Channel A 5-12-24V (1024imp./rev.) with output encoder line driver 5V enter 221 Ω with XJ1
Encoder 2 Channel /A
3 Channel B 5-12-24V (1024imp./rev.) with output encoder line driver 5V enter 221 Ω with XJ2
4 Channel /B
Power supply 5 5V-150 mA Internal Power supply (XJ3 pos 2-3) / External Power supply 12-24V (XJ3 removed)
Encoder 6 0V-Insulated encoder
Relay 7 RL3: contact relay configurable 1A-220Vac-charged R.
8
Relay 9 RL4: contact relay configurable 1A-220Vac-charged R.
10
Analog 2 11 Analog output 2 (+/- 10V)
12 0V-control
• resolution of analog outputs (-10V÷10V): 1/512

• resolution of analog inputs: 1/2000
• cycle time of the analog inputs: 2÷16 ms
• cycle time of the digital inputs: 2÷16 ms
• resolution of frequency – digital reference: 0.01Hz
• resolution of frequency – analog reference: 1/2000
• max absorption optoinsulated digital inputs: 5 mA
30 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
Terminal boards of control (XM1, XM2)
I/O EXPANSION BOARD
1 1 A
RL1 2 A
Encoder
2 3 B
3 4 B
RL2 5 5V
4 6 0V
ENC-SHIELD
5 7
FW
6 RV RL3
7 8
COM1
8 9
COM2
RL4
9 COM3
10 DREN 10
11
24V I/O
12 0V I/O 11
I/O SHIELD PWM1
13 + 10V 12
V
Analog output 2 -10/+10V
Pot. 14 JP2
+
5Kohm
Input +/-10V 475 Ean1
(4-20mA) 15 JP9
-
Analog inputs
Input 0/10V 4-20mA 16 +
475 Ean2
17 -
JP3
Analog output 1 0/10V

18
V PWM0
20 B-RS485 TX/RX
RS485 SERIAL OUTPUTS

21 A-RS485 TX/RX
Figure 3.5.2 Terminal boards of control by microprocessor

3.3 Description of the control signals
3.3.1 Digital Commands
The inverter GT1000 is forecast for signals of command with logic PNP.
The commands are operative when the relative terminal is closed on the 24Vcc (terminal 11 for internal power supply) through a clean contact
of relay or static contact .
5 5
6 6
+
24V
S1GT S1GT
11 11
12 12
Internal Power supply External Power supply

Figure 3.5.3
IMGT10002EN 31
Installation GT1000
enabling inverter (reference blocks diagram: DREN Drive Enable)

TERMINAL XM1-10:
Time of acquisition: 0
Closing the contact between terminals 10 and 11 you enable the inverter to command the transistor of power (IGBT).
REMARK The opening of the contact, with the running inverter causes the immediate switching OFF of the IGBT: the running
motor reaches the FREE REVOLUTION.
If you close the contact, with the run connected and the motor in movement, the inverter starts again to command the
motor, but the following cases may occur:
1) FOC CONTROL : the inverter detects, through the encoder, the speed in course and accelerates the motor until the speed set.
2) V/F CONTROL :
• Flying reconnection disabled (FLo.02=0). the GT1000 adjusts the frequency of output, starting from zero frequency; if the motor is still in
rotation, the overcurrent protection may occur (- OC) due to the difference between the output frequency and that of the motor in rotation.
• Flying reconnection enabled (FLo.02=1). The inverter, starting from maximum frequency, searches the frequency of the motor in rotation
and then accelerates the motor to the speed set. (see chap. 7.8.21).
REMARK The GT1000 must be enabled closing the terminal 10 also if the commands are sent via serial.
(FOC): run inverter / (V/F): run forward / stop

TERMINAL XM1-5:
Time of acquisition: 2ms
(FOC): run inverter (reference in blocks diagram: FW/ST Start)
Upon the closing of the contact 5-11 (with XM1-10 closed and in absence of alarms) the motor starts in speed ramp (or issues a torque in the
torque operation). The opening of the contact determines the stop in ramp of speed (or zero torque in the operation in torque) and, when
reaching the minimum speed , the switching off of the commands and the free rotation of the motor.
To maintain the GT1000 enabled you must put at zero the reference of speed keeping closed the contact 5-11.
(V/F): run forward / stop (reference in blocks diagram: FW /ST Forward)
The closing of the contact (with XM1-10 closed and in absence of alarms), causes the start in ramp of speed of the motor. Through Vvf.12 you
can introduce a waiting time of start.
The opening of the contact causes the stop in ramp of speed and when reaching the minimum speed (or at a frequency given by the Vvf.08) the
switching off of the commands and the free rotation of the motor
Through Vvf.09 and Vvf.10 you can program the braking in D.C.: in phase of stop, when the frequency of output goes below F-MIN (Vvf.11) or
Vvf.08, a direct voltage is injected on the motor. For the functions of the terminal 5 according to the parameters rEF.05 or rEF.06 placed at the
value 5, see description on chapter 7.8.4.
(FOC): command FLOW / (V/F): run forward / stop
TERMINAL XM1-6
Time of acquisition: 2ms
(FOC): command FLOW (reference blocks diagram: RV/FI)
The closing of the contact 6-11 determines the magnetization of the motor. The command must be given some tenths of second before that of
run and it allows to start with the motor already flowed, improving the speed response with very short ramps.
Letting connected this command, or that of run with zero speed, causes an emission of current on the motor at least equal to the magnetizing
current with eventual heating problems if the motor is not servoventilated.
(V/F): run back/stop (reference in blocks diagram: RV/FI ReVerse).
Similar to the terminal 5 (FW). It is operative with terminal 10 closed and absence of alarms.
The closing of the contact causes the start in ramp of speed of the motor but in the opposite side to the one of the terminal FW. The "stop in
ramp" is obtained with terminals 5 and 6 both open or both closed. The terminal 6 has no influence with the parameters rEF.05 or rEF.06 to the
value 5 (see the description of such parameters).
REMARK TERMINALS 7-8-9, called COM1, COM2, COM3 are programmable: here below we show their pre-arrangements by DEFAULT
TERMINAL XM1-7 COM1: command of references choice (reference blocks diagram: CF1 ).
TERMINAL XM1-8 COM2: command choice references (reference blocks diagram: CF2 ).
The choice of the references is made according to the following table: CF1 CF2 References
The references Mux1 and Mux2 are determined by the selectors OFF OFF Mux1
rEF.05 and rEF.06. ON OFF Mux2
The complete choice of the references is made according to the table OFF ON Dig3: rEF.09
indicated on chap. 7.8.4
ON ON Dig4: rEF.10
TERMINAL XM1-9 COM3: command of reset alarms references (reference blocks diagram: RST).
TERMINAL XM1-11 24Vdc commands common.
TERMINAL XM1-12 0Vdc commands listed.
REMARK The closing of the contact XM1-9 with XM1-11 performs the reset of the active protection if the cause has been removed. It
does not perform a Hardware reset of the board of control. It is not active if there no protections are occurred.
32 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Installation
3.5.2.2 Signals to set the speed

If you choose the reference of speed/frequency from terminal board you have various possibilities:
a) From potentiometer 2-10 kΩ (rated value 5 kΩ).
b) External signal of voltage 0÷±10V. Input impedance 40kΩ.
c) External signal of current 0/4÷20mA. Input impedance 475Ω.
d) Through contacts (enabling the motor potentiometer function ).
Do not connect generators of voltage of value equal or greater than 15v to the terminals of the analog inputs
Motor Potentiometer MIN. Default MAX

Table of the main parameters. FLo.01 0 0 1
Fn1.01 1 1 6
Fn1.02 -6000 RPM / 0.1 Hz 1500 RPM / 60.0 Hz 6000 RPM / 480.0 Hz
Fn1.03 -6000 RPM / 0.1 Hz -1500 RPM / 60.0 Hz 6000 RPM / 480.0 Hz
The software function motor potentiometer must be first prearranged by setting at 8 rEF.05 or rEF.06 and then enabled by placing FLo.01 at 1.
You must choose, furthermore, between the three programmable inputs the commands of UP and DW (see configuration of digital inputs).
• Operation
The parameter Fn1.04 represents the position relative to the motor potentiometer; it is modified activating the terminals which perform
respectively a function of UP and DOWN. If they are both open or closed, the motor potentiometer is stopped.
The speed of variation is chosen with the parameter Fn1.01.
Fn1.01= 1÷6 corresponding to a time between 8 and 48 s
The time indicated is the one corresponding to a variation of 0 at 100%.
The position of the motor potentiometer, from 0 to 100%, is then translated in revolution through Fn1.02 and Fn1.03.
Fn1.03 corresponds to the position of minimum (0%), while Fn1.02 to the one of maximum (100%).
Placing Fn1.09 = 0, upon the switching off, the position set is saved in EEPROM.
Placing Fn1.09 = 1 the current value of Fn1.04 is not saved in EEPROM and upon each restart, it restarts from zero. The complete description
of this function is in chapter 7.8.20 of the manual.
3.5.2.3 Analog outputs
• ANALOG 1 - MOTOR SPEED
With the programming of default (Aot.01=1) upon terminal18 of XM1 it is available a signal in voltage proportional to the speed of the motor. Use
an analog instrument 0-10V of end of scale (1mA).
The maximum signal (+10V) is made to correspond to a speed/frequency of output in a module equal to the greatest in absolute value between
the parameters Mot.19 and Mot.20.
• ANALOG 2 (only with expansion board of encoder: GEDEA1)- CURRENT/TORQUE
By default (Aot.04=3) on the terminal 11 of XM2 we have a signal proportional to the effective value of the output current.
In this case the end of scale is equal to 250%INP (rated current of inverter).
If you wish placing the logic parameter Aot.04=9 you read in output a value proportional to the estimated torque of the motor. the 10V correspond
to the 250% of the rated torque of the motor. The complete description of the outputs PWM is in chapter 7.8.11 of the manual.
3.5.2.4 Digital outputs
RELAY “DRIVE OK” Power supply of the drive Situation of the drive Contact 1-2
It is available on terminal board (1-2) the contact of a relay with the Present Normal Closed
following logic of closing: Present Abnormal Open
Electric characteristics of the contacts: 220 Vac 1A resistive charge. Disconnected Open
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS STATUS FOC V/F
There are four internal status: R1-R2-R3-R4 concerning the R1=1 Vel>rEF.17 (rEF.17>0) |f|>|rEF.17|
speed/frequency with the following logic: Vel <rEF.17 (rEF.17<0)
R2=1 Vel >rEF.18 (rEF.18>0) |f|>|rEF.18|
Vel <rEF.18 (rEF.18<0)
R3=1 | Vel |<rEF.19 |f|<rEF.19
R4=1 | Vel -rif.|<rEF.20 |f-rif|<rEF.20
These 4 status can be associated to a relay of output RL2 Power supply inverter R1/R2/R3/R4 Contact
(terminals 3-4 of XM1) or other two more relays RL3 RL4 placed on Present 1 Closed
the expansion board (respectively terminals 7-8, 9-10 of XM2) Present 0 Open
programming the parameters dot.01÷03.
Absent Open
IMGT10002EN 33
Installation GT1000
3.4 Installation checklist
The mechanical and electrical installation must be verified before the startup.
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Ambient temperature and humidity within specifications.
Unit mounted properly on a vertical, non-flammable surface.
Cooling path not obstructed.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Drive properly grounded.
Mains voltage matches nominal input voltage of frequency converter drive.
Mains connections properly:
Routed
Tightened
Input connections properly:
Routed
Tightened
Control connections properly:
Routed
Tightened
Appropriate input fuses installed.
No output compensation capacitors in motor connections.
No tools or other foreign objects remaining inside the enclosure.
34 IMGT10002EN
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 Safety precautions
All interventions of electric maintenance and installation on GT1000 must be performed by qualified technical
personnel. Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali is not liable for damages due to improper or unauthorized maintenance.
CAUTION! DANGER! RISK OF DEATH OR ELECTRIC SHOCK! It is necessary to strictly use these measures before
proceeding with the maintenance of the unit:
Perform the procedure of lock/unlock of electric power supply and open the main disconnecting switch of the
electric panel in which it is contained the GT1000.
Make sure that all electric supplies arriving to the inverter (main supply, auxiliary supplies) are disconnected
before performing maintenance on the inverter
Await at least ten (10) minutes after disconnecting electric power supply. Let discharge the condensers of the bus
DC before performing maintenance on the unit or accessing to the terminals of the motor. Please refer to the
safety label placed on each inverter.
Before performing maintenance interventions on the machine await 10 minutes after disconnecting all electric
power supplies and verify that the voltage DC is lower than 50V. Use a multimeter by 1000 Volt DC or greater.
The modules IGBT are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. Handle them with care to avoid possible damages.
Do not let open the terminals of command gate-emitter. Short circuit these pins with antistatic sponge or with a
metallic shunt when they are not connected to the command card. Remove the short circuit, when you
reconnect the command card. Do not touch the pins of the device with fingers. Please refer tot he following
figure while you test an IGBT device.
Figure 4.1 Control of IGBT

Input/Ouput Bridges test
The instrument suitable for that operation is a digital multimeter set to “diodes test”
Check the diodes and the IGBTs after having disconnected the power terminals to avoid false measurements due to external devices. The first
step is to do a visual test then follow the sequence shown below:
IGBTs INPUT BRIDGE
Multimeter + test prod U V W -Vc -Vc - Vc L1 L2 L3 - Vc - Vc - Vc
Multimeter – test prod +Vc +Vc +Vc U V W +Vc +Vc +Vc L1 L2 L3
Device Du Dv Dw Dx Dy Dz D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
Correct value 0.25 ÷ 0.4 Vdc 0.35 ÷ 0.5 Vdc
Maintenance GT1000
4.2 Preventive maintenance

VFD maintenance requirements fall into three basic categories:
1. · keep it clean
2. · keep it dry
3. · keep the connections tight.
♦ Dust on VFD hardware can cause a lack of airflow, resulting in diminished performance from heat sinks and
CAUTION ! circulating fans.
♦ Dust on an electronic device can cause malfunction or even failure.
Dust absorbs moisture, which also contributes to failure.
♦ The air used for cleaning the dusty surface must be oil-free and dry.
♦ Heat cycles and mechanical vibration can lead to sub-standard connections.
♦ A screw has maximum clamping power at a torque value specific to its size, shape, and composition,
exceeding that torque value permanently reduces the clamping power of that screw by reducing its elasticity
and deforming it.
Periodically check:
Wires are not damaged
Terminals are tight
Drive and motor ambient temperature does not exceed recommended specifications
Boards are free of dust and condensation
Insulation is not damaged or discolored
Vents or the areas next to the drive fans are not obstructed.
ELECTRONIC BOARDS
Boards do not require particular maintenance operations. Periodically remove the dust without using compressed air. Components sensitive
to electrostatic charges are mounted on the boards.
HEATSINK
Periodically remove the dust.
FANS
Assuming an average temperature of 35°C and 20 operating hours a day, the average life of the fan is about 3-4 years.
The increase in fan noise produced by the bearings and the gradual temperature increase of the Heatsink are symptoms of possible failure.
CAPACITORS
Assuming an average temperature of 35°C and 20 operating hours a day, the average life of the electrolytic capacitors is about 5-6 years.
Electrolytic capacitors keep their original characteristics only if they are energized within 2 years from the supply date. Before commissioning
devices stored for over two years, it is advisable to power up the drive for at least two hours without running the motor to restore the original
characteristics of the capacitors.
Contact Application Department for more information.
4.3 Disposal
The GT1000 drive does not come under some category of products included in the 2002/96/CE (RAEE) Directive, at which also the
2002/95/CE (RoHS) Directive refers, so it is not subjected to these Directive.
The GT1000 drive cannot be considered a "finished product" according to the 2002/96/CE Directive and the Directive does not cover being it
for industrial plants
The GT1000 drive cannot be used in other equipments/devices that must be compliance to the above European directives.
The Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali products are designed and manufactured with particular attention to the environmental impact. Most part of the
components of the drives are recyclable or easily disposable according the RAEE Directive.
The model GT1000 contains raw materials which must be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources.
The GT1000 does not contain toxic or noxious substances.
All packing materials and metal parts are recyclable.
The plastic parts may be recycled or burnt in a controlled way according to local rules.
The capacitors of the intermediate circuit (BUS DC) contains an electrolyte and the cards by printed circuit contain lead which must be
removed and treated according to the local law in force where the disposal takes place.
5 APPLICATION NOTES
5.1 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Even though the drives vary in power and size, the key components are common. Such components include:
• Terminals of power in input • Card by microprocessor
• Rectifying circuit of input • Keypad
• Precharge • Card of power and piloting
• Capacitors bus DC • Modules of power by IGBT
• Terminals of output power
The terminals of input AC and the rectifier of input are not necessary for the applications in bus DC. For
REMARK some applications the keypad and/or the card by microprocessor cannot be installed.
The Figure 5.1 shows a wiring diagram of the inverter. The inverter consists of three main components:
• Section of converter AC-DC
• DC Bus
• Section of inverter
The converter or the rectifying circuit converts the alternate voltage of input AC to a fixed frequency in a direct voltage continua of bus DC
rectified. The bus DC is made of electrolytic capacitors whose task is to filter the residual ripple of line and store energy. The modules IGBT
are commanded to convert the voltage DC in a three-phase voltage of output AC, which varies both in frequency and in amplitude, suitable to
control that the asynchronous motor is connected.
AC/DC CONVERTIER BUS INVERTER (FROM DC TO AC)
Precharge Resistor
Precharge
C C C
Contactor
G E G E G E
AC BUS DC
INPUT VDC MOTOR
CAPACITORS
C C C
G E G E G E
INPUT DIODE RECTIFIER IGBT OUTPUT POWER

Figure 5.1 Scheme of the inverter
REMARK The contactor of precharge in some sizes is on power supply DC negative ( refer to power diagrams in Appendix A).
Application notes GT1000
5.1.1 Scheme of the inverter
ηinv ηΜ , cosϕΜ
IN, AN
IL L ID, PD
M PM
Input
UL UN
reactor
Rectifier Inverter
DC link
Capacitors
Figure 5.2 Single wire diagram of the inverter
AN = power apparent of output( of plate)

AN = 3 ⋅ U N ⋅ I N
IN = Rated current of output (RMS)
A = rated voltage of output (RMS)
PM = AN ⋅ η M ⋅ cos ϕ M PM = mechanical power available to motor shaft
M = performance of the motor
cos M = cos fi motor
PM PD = power transiting in continuous(DC bus)
PD = = performance of inverter
η M ⋅ η inv inv
PD ID = average value of direct current(Dc bus)

ID = UL = voltage of input (RMS)
1.35 ⋅ U L
I L = 0.87 ⋅ I D Current of input RMS (presuming a reactance of input of the 3%)
I L = 1.25 ⋅ I D Current of input RMS (without reactance of input)
I D = 1.32 ⋅ I M ⋅ cos ϕ M Presuming inv = 0.97
I L = 1.15 ⋅ I M ⋅ cos ϕ M Current of input RMS (presuming a reactance of input of the 3% & UL= A)
I L = 1.65 ⋅ I M ⋅ cos ϕ M Current of input RMS (presuming a reactance of input of the 0% & UL= A)
GT1000 Application notes
5.1.2 USEFUL FORMULAS

Table 5.1.1
Quantity Formulas Note and exemples
Synchronous Speed RatedLFreqency
120 ×
Motor L poles
Volt / Hertz Ratio Voltage For a motor at 460 VAC and rated frequency 60 Hz.
Frequency V/Hz = 460/60 = 7.66 V/Hz
Torque Force× Length An arm of 1 ft(0.305 m) by a force of 20 lbs(88.9
Newton) is equal to 20 ft-lbs(27.1Nm) or torque.
Coppia necessaria per Power× 5250 Use the proper formula suitable to obtain the torque in ft-
accelerare un motore Speed(RPM) lbs (above equation) or in in-lbs (below equation).
Power × 63000
Speed (RPM)
Horse power (HP) Torque (ft- lbs) × speed (RPM) Use the proper formula suitable to the three torque
(AC motors) 5250 measure (ft-lbs or in-lbs). (Kw)
Torque(Nm) × speed(RPM)
6300
Current (Amps) Voltage (Volt) Ohm law
Resistence (Ohm)
Resistence (Ohm) Voltage (Volt) Ohm law
Current (Ampere)
Voltage (Volt) Current(Am pere) × Resistence (Ohm) Ohm law
Power of three phase Voltage (Volt) × Current (Ampere) × 1.73
circuit (KVA) 1000
Motor voltage Motor− Frequency If a motor at 460V, 60 Hz works at 48 Hz, the motor
× ratedVolt
(For operation under the BaseFrequency 48 Hz
voltage shall be: x 460 V = 368 V
basic speed) 60 Hz
Table 5.1.2 USEFUL CONVERSION FACTOR

Category Multiply by to obtain
Length meters 3.281 feet
meters 39.37 inches
inches 0.0254 meters
feet 0.3048 meters
millimeters 0.0394 inches
Newton-meter 0.7376 lb/ft
Torque
lb-ft 1.3558 Newton-meter
lb-in 0.0833 lb-ft
lb-ft 12.00 lb-in
RPM 6.00 degrees/s
Rotation
RPM 0.1047 rad/s
degrees/s 0.1667 RPM
rad/s 9.549 RPM
Newton-meters2 2.42 lb-ft2
Moment of Inertia
oz-in2 0.000434 lb-ft2
lb-in2 0.00694 lb-ft2
slug-ft2 32.17 lb-ft2
oz-in-sec2 0.1675 lb-ft2
lb-in-sec2 2.68 lb-ft2
watts 0.00134 hp
Power
lb-ft/min 0.0000303 hp
hp 746.00 watts
hp 33000.00 lb-ft/min
BTU/hour 0.293 watts
Temperature (Celsius degrees) : tc (°C)
Temperature
Temperature (Fahrenheit degrees) : tf (°F)
5 9
t c = (t f − 32) (°C) t f = 32 + t c (°F)
9 5
5.2 Selection of the inverter
• The choice of the inverter must be based on the rated current of the inverter, instead of on the power of the inverter. The current of output
of the inverter must be greater than the rated current of the motor controlled.
• If a single drive supplies various motors, it must be chosen an inverter with a current of output greater than the 10% compared to the sum
of the motor currents. Foresee a hardware thermal protection independent for each motor; the internal software thermal protection of the
inverter is not effective for the applications with various motors.
• The vectorial control cannot be used in the applications to various motors. Use instead a control V/Hz. (Exception: two equal motors in
mechanical axe)
• If the application to various motors requires to disconnect and reconnect some motors during the operation of the drive , choose an
inverter with a rated value of current suitable to support the sum of the normal currents of all the motors connected plus the current of
insertion of and/or the motor/s which must be reconnected.
• The starting torque and of acceleration of the motor controlled by the inverter is limited by the maximum current of the inverter. Choose
an oversized inverter if you require a high starting torque.
5.3 Application notes
• If an application requires an external contactor , the contactor should be commuted only when the inverter is not running.. The contactor
should be interlocked with the logic of run of the inverter.
• If the inverter is blocked, the motor shaft goes in free revolution. If this is not admittable, it is necessary to foresee a mechanical brake.
• If the inverter is supplied by a generating set, verify that the generator is in a position to support the harmonic distortion produced by the
inverter.
• The inverter disposes of the option of braking in dc. Its use may cause motor temperatures quite high. If it is required the frequent use of
this function, verify that the motor us suitably sized or contact the manufacturer of the motor.
5.4 Applications with special motors
• MOTORS WITH BRAKE. The brake must have an electric power supply independent. When the brake is clutched, o, the inverter must be
disabled.
• MOTORS WITH CONIC ROTOR. The brake is controlled by the magnetic field of the motor; if necessary introduce or adjust the boost; in
some cases it may be necessary use an inverter of greater size.
• MOTORS WITH DOUBLE WINDING. The current of output of the inverter must be greater than the rated current of each motor winding.
The winding can be commuted when the motor and the inverter are not operating.
• CLASSIFIED MOTORS. The inverter cannot be operated in environments with danger of explosion or fire. If the motor and the inverter
must be operated in similar environments, you must forecast both of them in antiexplosion configuration.
• TRANSMISSION JOINTS. The lubrication system and the limits of revolution vary among the manufacturers; with lubricating oil, frequent
operations at low speeds may cause an overheating due to insufficient lubrication. Verify with the manufacturer the possibility of extended
operation at these speed.
• SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS. We suggest to foresee a reactance of output to compensate the insufficient inductance in the motor.
• SUBMERSED MOTOR PUMPS. The rated current of these motors is greater than the standard one.
• SINGLE PHASE MOTORS. The GT1000 are not designed to control single phase motors.
GT1000 Application notes
5.5 Motor choice
When you select a motor, verify that:

A. The ventilation of the motor is suitable for the field of speed of operation forecast. An extended operation with low speed requires an
auxiliary cooling of the motor (see the zone marked 1-2).
B. The motor is capable of supplying a suitable torque of overload on the field of speed of operation (see the zone marked 3 4).).
Typical curves
Torque
Rated torque
1.75
Torque usable Vs. speed
1.50 1. Self ventilated motor: permanent work torque
3 2. Motor by forced ventilation: permanent work
1.25
torque
4
1
0.95 Overload vs Speed
2 3. Overload torque in the field with constant torque
0.75
1 4. torque overload in the deflowed field
0.50
0.25
0
1 25 50 75 100 50Hz
1 30 60 90 120 60Hz
Basic speed
(1) Overload torque limited to 1.1 Tn (Rated torque) in applications with variable torque.
• With speed greater than the basic speed verify with the manufacturer of the motor the possibility of use
CAUTION! of the same.
• In operation in overspeed there may be vibrations due to unbalance of the rotor and vibrations of the
load
• The noise of the motor may increase
• NATURAL RESONANCE. Vibration can be minimized by using a flexible coupling or by placing a rubber shock absorber beneath the
motor base. With the drive it is possible to avoid critical frequencies.
• NOISE. The noise of the motors increases compared to the operation with supply from the net (inverter commuting frequency
= 2kHz). The use of output reactors or of sinusoidal filters reduces or cancels the noise increase.
• The GT1000 provides a control by variable frequency. The motors and the loads must be capable to operate in the whole field of speed
and of power supplied by the inverter.
• PROTECTING THE MOTOR WINDING AND BEARINGS
The output of the drive comprises – regardless of output frequency – pulses of approximately 1.35 times the mains network voltage with
a very short rise time.
This is the case with all drives employing modern IGBT inverter technology.
The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals, depending on the motor cable properties.
This in turn can cause additional stress on the motor insulation.
Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching frequencies can cause current pulses through the
motor bearings which can gradually erode the bearing races.
The stress on motor insulation can be avoided by using optional du/dt filters. du/dt filters also reduce bearing currents.
To avoid damage to motor bearings, insulated N-end (non-driven end) bearings and output filters must be used according to the table
5A. In addition, the cables must be selected and installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
SELF-EXCITATION OF THE MOTOR. The phenomenon is highly destructive and dangerous, as it provokes damages to the equipment; said
phenomenon can happen in the event that a LC filter is connected to the inverter output. Verify that the current absorbed by the capacitor
bank of the LC filter at inverter output is less than 90% of the motor no-load current.
• SELF-EXCITATION OF THE MOTOR. The phenomenon is highly destructive and dangerous, as it provokes damages to the equipment;
said phenomenon can happen in the event that a LC filter is connected to the inverter output. Verify that the current absorbed by the
capacitor bank of the LC filter at inverter output is less than 90% of the motor no-load current.
WARNING ! Before connecting the inverter to the motor, verify that the current absorbed by the capacitor bank of
the LC filter at inverter output (see the capacity values of the working diagram enclosed to the supply) is
less than 90% of the motor no-load current.
It is necessary to verify this condition in order to avoid the possibility of self-excitation of the motor, with
consequent heavy damages both for the equipment and for the operators.
The table 5.5 shows how to select the motor insulation system and when optional du/dt filter, insulated N-end (non-driven end) motor bearings
and common mode filters are required.
The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation. Failure of the motor to fulfil the following
requirements or improper installation may shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings.
TABLE 5.5
Motor type Rated mains voltage (AC line Requirement for
voltage) Motor insulation system du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing
PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 350 kW
and frame size < IEC 315 or frame size > IEC 315
- 134 HP < PN < 469 HP
or frame size > NEMA 500
Random wound UN < 420 V Standard: ÛLL =1300V + N + CMF
and form-wound 420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: ÛLL =1300V + du/dt + du/dt + N
or
Reinforced: ÛLL =1600V, - + N or CMF
0.2µs rise time
Note 1: The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.

Abbreviation Definition
UN rated voltage of the supply network
ÛLL peak line-to-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must withstand
PN motor rated power
du/dt du/dt filter at the output of the drive
CMF common mode filter
N N-end bearing: insulated motor non-driven end bearing
N.A. Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Note 2: Explosion-safe (EX) motors
The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and additional requirements for
explosion-safe (EX) motors.
Note 3: High-output motors and IP 23 motors
For motors with higher rated output than what is stated for the particular frame size in EN 50347 (2001) and for IP 23 motors, the
requirements of range “100 kW < PN < 350 kW” apply to motors with 40 kW < PN < 100 kW. The requirements of range “PN > 350 kW”
apply to motors with PN within the range of “100 kW < PN < 350 kW”.
Note 4: Resistor braking of the drive
When the drive is in braking mode for a large part of its operation time, the intermediate circuit DC voltage of the drive increases, the
effect being similar to increasing the supply voltage by up to 20 percent. The voltage increase should be taken into consideration when
determining the motor insulation requirement.
Example: Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V application must be selected as if the drive were supplied with 480 V.
6 OPTIONS
6.1 Braking unit
6.1.1 Introduction
The GT1000 series “F”, if required, may be equipped with an internal braking unit mounted at our premises. The product code identifies the braking
unit with the 10th character; letter “B” in the 10th position indicates that the brake is mounted inside, while the letter “N” indicates that the GT1000
has not the braking unit installed. The braking unit internal is standard until the size S1GT028 included (See chapter 2 for further details).
The braking unit is necessary when the braking torque required exceeds 15% the rated torque of the motor.
The maximum braking torque allowed using the braking unit cannot exceed 150% of the rated torque of the motor. The braking unit is always
supplied without the resistor. The braking resistor may be calculated according to the formulas indicated in section 6.1.3.
The braking device can manage a continued braking power calculated for the 50% of the rated power of the motor (see chapter 2 paragraph 2.4
“Electric Data”).
Remarks:
• The ohmic value of the resistor is specified for a line voltage between 380 and 440 Volt.
• For voltages up to 480V, the ohmic value must be increased about 7%.
• For critical performance cycles (e.g. lifting applications) consult the manufacturer.
Table 6.1 GT1000. Braking unit, resistors and fuses for mains 380V - 480V ±10%
Inverter Rb Resistor Cont. Typical resistor 1) External fuses
minimum value * Power Rating Bussmann Ferraz Code

switch
@ 400V @ 480V KW KW Ω SAP Code (A-V) BSS88…. - -
S1GT0P3 200Ω 215 1 0,6 3X110 in series ELC40949901 10-690 10CT- - -
S1GT0P4 200Ω 215 1,5 0,6 3X110 in series ELC40949901 10-690 10CT-
S1GT0P6 100Ω 110 2 1,3 2X55 in series ELC40950001 10-690 10CT-
S1GT008 80Ω 86 3 1,3 2X55 in series ELC40950001 20-690 20CT
S1GT011 60Ω 65 4 1,3 2X55 in series ELC40950001 20-690 20CT - -
S1GT015 40Ω 44 5 2,2 55 ELC40950201 20-690 20CT
S1GT018 40Ω 44 5 2,2 55 ELC40950201 20-690 20CT
S1GT022 30Ω 32 7,5 4 55 ELC40950301 40-690 40FE 6,6URS7/40 ELC402429
S1GT028 20Ω 22 9 4 28 ELC40950302 40-690 40FE 6,6URS7/40 ELC402429
S1GT030 20Ω 22 9 4 28 ELC40950302 40-690 40FE 6,6URS7/40 ELC402429
S1GT036F 20Ω 22 9 4 28 ELC40950302 40-690 40FE 6,6URS7/40 ELC402429
S1GT045F 13 Ω 14 11 8 15 ELC40950403 80-690 80FE 6,6URS17/80 ELC402432
S1GT053F 10 Ω 11 15 8 15 ELC40950403 80-690 80FE 6,6URS17/80 ELC402432
S1GT066F 10 Ω 11 15 8 15 ELC40950403 80-690 80FE ELC402432 ELC402432
Internal fuses
S1GT086F 7Ω 8 25 16 2x15 in parallel ELC40950403 140-690 140EET ELC402446
S1GT108F 7Ω 8 25 16 2x15 in parallel ELC40950403 140-690 140EET ELC402446
S1GT125F 5Ω 5,5 40 16 2x15 in parallel ELC40950403 140-690 2x140EET ELC402446
S1GT150F 3,3 Ω 3,6 50 32 4x15 in parallel ELC40950403 140-690 2x140EET ELC402446
S1GT182F 3,3 Ω 3,6 50 32 4x15 in parallel ELC40950403 140-660 ELC402446
S1GT216F 4 + 4Ω 4,4+4,4Ω 2 x 70 16+16 2x(2x10) in parallel ELC40950404 140-660 ELC402446
S1GT258F 3,3+3,3Ω 3,7+3,7Ω 2 x 70 16+16 2x(2x10) in parallel ELC40950404 140-660 ELC402446
6.1.2 Installation
The resistors must be installed outside the inverter and connected with a shielded cable of suitable section.
The resistor reaches high temperatures; avoid, then, its installation near the drive or any device which may be damaged by the heat emission.
The rated power of the resistor is not calculated to operate with duty-cycle=1. In case of malfunction of the power braking switch, the resistor is
directly connected on the mains through the rectifying bridge. In a similar situation, the resistor heats up to a high temperature and there may
be a malfunction of the resistor itself. To avoid such situation, the resistor must be protected by a suitable temperature relay: its intervention
must open the main switches which protects the input line.
Each resistor must be protected by a suitable thermal

protector opening the remote contactor of mains in case of
intervention.
IMGT10002EN 43
Options GT1000
6.1.3 Choice of the resistor

When the speed (frequency) of an asynchronous motor is quickly reduced, the motor works as asynchronous generator providing again power
supply to the inverter.
A part of the power is dissipated inside the motor (with torque corresponding about to 10-20% of the rated torque of the motor), the rest of
power is accumulated on the capacitors of the intermediate circuits of the inverter with an increase in voltage at their ends. to avoid reaching
too high voltage values, with a subsequent intervention of the protection of maximum voltage of the inverter, a dynamic braking unit is used.
An electronic circuit detects the voltage on the bench of the inverter’s capacitors and, when its voltage exceeds a pre-defined value, it is
enabled the power transistor of the braking unit which connects the braking resistor in parallel to the capacitors bench.
As soon as the DC voltage returns to its normal values, the power transistor is disabled.
The ohmic value of the resistor and its power depend upon the type of inverter, from the inertia of the moving masses, from the load torque
and the deceleration time.
The figure 6.1 provides the definitions for the terms in use when a motor is braked by a starting speed N1, until a final speed N2.
The formulas for the calculation of the power of the resistors are indicated here below.
N (RPM)
N1
N2
t
tb
Tc (s)
Figure 6.1
Terms and symbols in use:
MB = braking torque of the motor from speed N1 to N2 in a time tb Nm
J = total inertia to the motor shaft. Kgm2
ML = load torque to the motor shaft. Nm
PR = resistor average power. W
WB = braking energy. J
MN = Rated torque of the motor = 60 ⋅ P (Nm) Nm
2π ⋅ N
N = Rated speed of the motor RPM
P = Rated power of the motor W
V = Rated DC voltage of braking (See the values indicated in table 6.1-3)
M =
(
2π ⋅ J ⋅ N1 - N2 )−M In the worst case MB = 1.5 MN
NM
B 60 ⋅ tb L
Ω
V2 1
R = ⋅
B 0.10472 ⋅ M ⋅ N1 1.2
B
W =
(
0.10472 ⋅ M - 0.2 ⋅ M
B N
⋅ N1 + N2 )
⋅ tb
( ) J
B 2
W W
P = B
R Tc
The ohmic value of RB must be ≥ than the value indicated in table 6.1.
The braking voltage is automatically selected according to the mains rated voltage set in the parameter drv.05:
AC voltage class of the GT1000 (parameter drv.05) Voltage DC of braking (to be used in the formula)
xfrom 380 to 415V 680
From 416 to 499V 750
500V 800
After the calculations, the braking resistor may be specified using the following values:
• value ohm (Ω), braking energy (J), work cycle, peak voltage to the ground 1200 Volt.
44 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Options
6.2 Keypad
6.2.1 Keypad installation
Figure 6.2.1 The keypad is connected to the control board through a flat cable Figure 6.2.2 The keypad is kept in horizontal position by
terminated by telephone connectors. a triggering tongue placed on the front cover. Release
the keypad using a screw driver.
IMGT10002EN 45
Options GT1000
6.2.2 Installation on panel door

For the remoting of the keypad on the door, an optional kit has been forecast, made of:
SVGTRK ELC452936 Keypad remote kit for S1GT0P3 – 028F and S1GT182-258F
SVGTRKB 1000087515 Keypad remote kit for S1GT030-150
SVGTRK SVGTRKB
• SHELL to mount the keypad • SHELL to mount the keypad
• SHIELDED CABLE of connection (length ≈ 2m) to the GT1000 • SHIELDED CABLE of connection (length ≈ 2m) to the GT1000
(connector X3 of the control board) (connector X3 of the control board)
• SUPPORTS of fixation • SUPPORTS of fixation
• Two gaskets for the recess and connector hole • Two gaskets for the recess and connector hole
• Adaptor, installed on the drive door instead of the keypad, for X3
connector accessibility.
The assembly of the shell requires a slot on the door

150
110
ON Fault RUN
STOP MAN AUTO RESET
Enter
Canc.
SHIFT
Figure 6.2.3 Keypad assembly shell.

Keypad protection degree: IP54
Shell protection degree: IP54 (with gasket for the recess - code1000072882 and for the connector hole code 1000072881)
46 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Options
6.3 Expansion board for encoder input (GEDEA)

6.3.1 Board description
The board is installed on the GT1000 control board (fig.6.3.2).
It must be connected or disconnected with the drive not supplied; during the operations of maintenance or replacement you must take suitable
precautions against the electrostatic discharge.
Pay attention during the plugging in of the connectors K4, KE1 on the GT1000 control board: don’t bend the connector pins.
GEDEA board is indispensable, with operation in field oriented control (FOC), for the reading of the encoder installed on the motor; it allows
the reading of the encoder installed on the motor and the management of a second encoder used as inverter speed reference.
K4
XM2: expansion of the control terminal board U18
U11
XM3: II° encoder input JDP1
RL3, RL4: configurable relays U16 U15
U13
SW1-1, SW1-2: dip-switch for the connection of
1
the encoder channel line resistors
6
U9
U10
JP1: jumper for encoder supply
D17
U12
9
5
U14
F1 JP1
SW1
GEDEA
U17
RL3
XM3 KE1
KE
RL4
Figura 6.3.1 XM2
Table 6.3.1 Description of terminal board XM2
1 Channel A 5-12-24V (1024imp./rev.) with 5V line driver encoder enter 221 Ω with SW1-1 in ON position
Encoder 2 Channel A
3 Channel B 5-12-24V (1024imp./rev.) with 5V line driver encoder enter 221 Ω with SW1-2 in ON position
4 Channel B
Power supp. 5 5V-150 mA Internal power supply (JP1 in ON position )
Encoder 6 0V-insulated for encoder
Relay 3 7-8 RL3: configurable relay contact 1A-220Vac-charge R.
Relay 4 9-10 RL4: configurable relay contact 1A-220Vac-charge R.
Analog 2 11 Analog output 2 (+/- 10V)
12 0V-control
The terminal board XM3 is used for the connection of the channel of the second encoder. The power supply (0V e 5Vdc internial) is common
with the encoder feedback and available to terminal XM2-5 and XM2-6.
The pulses/revolution of the encoder feedback must be 1024. The pulses/revolution of the second encoder shall be according the application.
Table 6.3.2 Description of the terminal board XM3

1 Canale A
5-12-24V (with 5V line driver encoder output enter 221 Ω with SW1-3 in ON position)
II° Encoder 2 Canale A
3 Canale B
5-12-24V (with 5V line driver encoder output enter 221 Ω with SW1-4 in ON position)
4 Canale B
NOTE: With the jumper JP1 = ON it is available the 5Vdc on the terminal XM2-5. With the jumper JP1 = ON the terminal XM2- 5 is alive and
so both the encoder are supplied with external power supply.
IMGT10002EN 47
Options GT1000
6.3.2 Board installation

From the figure on the side we can see how it is mounted the K1
expansion board over the inverter control board. The
connection connectors between the two boards are indicated
JP8
GSCMA
with KE, KE1 and KE4 (see figure 3.5.1). U25
U27
JP7
U24
K4
U18
U11
JDP1 U26
U16 U15
U13
JP5
1
JP4
6
Figure 6.3.2
U9
U10
D17 U28
U12
9
5
U14
DL2 X3
PS1 F1 JP1
DL1
SW1
GEDEA
JP1 DL4
U17
RL3 JP6
KE1 JP2
XM3
JP9
RL1
RL2
KE
RL4 JP3
XM2
XM1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
6.3.3 Check of the encoder

1) Verify the mechanical installation of the encoder according to the specifications of the manufacturer.
2) Check that the encoder pre-arrangements for power supply and reception on the GEDEA board are correct according the following cases:
Scheme Power supply and type of encoder Jumper position

I 5V internal - line driver 5V 1024 imp./rev. SW1-1, SW1-2 = ON, JP1 closed
II 24/5V external - line driver 5V 1024 imp./rev. SW1-1, SW1-2 = ON, JP1 closed
III 12/24V external - push-pull 1024 imp./rev. SW1-1, SW1-2 = OFF), JP1 removed
3) Check the wiring in encoder-inverter verifying the prper functional correspondences of the conductors and of terminals (power supply +5Vdc,
or 24Vdc or 12Vdc, mass, channel A, channel A, etc... ). Check that the terminals are well tightened. For the connection, use in any case a
shielded cable, possibly twisted, connected according to the diagrams in figure 6.3.3.
4) With encoder line driver 5V (power supply from drive) proceed as follows: Supply the drive keeping it in stand-by (terminal 10 open, writing
"rdy" on the display). With the encoder stopped, perform with a normal tester in direct the following voltage measurements on the terminals.
positive rod negative rod ACCEPTABLE VALUES

+5V mass (0 volt) from 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc
If you measure a value lower than 4.8Vdc disconnect the conductors from terminals and measure the voltage as idle. If a low value out of
tolerance remains, verify the electronic board at an authorized assistance center. If on the contrary, on idle the voltage is included in a correct
value, verify, among the data supplied by the encoder's manufacturer, the current absorbed; we remind that the maximum current of the
encoder power supply (0-5V) is 150mA. If the data is compatible, verify that there are no wiring errors and eventually replace the encoder.
terminal A terminal A with positive or negative sign according to the position of the encoder,
terminal B terminal B but not lower than 3 Vdc
If the previous measure has a positive result, proceed as follows:

If the voltage between a channel and its negative reaches the value of 3Vdc, verify the voltages between the terminals and the mass (0 volt).
In regular situation you should obtain:
on the terminals of input of the terminal of mass from 3.4 to 3.8Vdc if on the channel there is a logic level HIGH
channels (A, A, B, B) (0 volt) from 0.1 to 0.3Vdc if on the channel there is a logic level LOW
If the result of at least 8 of these measurements is negative, proceed as follows:

a) check again the wirings
b) measure in ohm the resistance between A andA, between B andB: about 220 ohm should result
c) try to connect to another encoder
If the result is positive you may proceed with the first start of the system inverter-motor-encoder.
48 IMGT10002EN
GT1000 Options
Scheme I Standard version

Encoder line driver 5V, internal supply.
SW1-1=ON,SW1-2=ON,JP1 Closed XM2 Encoder inputs board
A 1 SW1-1:ON GEDEA1
A/ 2
JP1:ON
B 3 SW1-2:ON
5Venc
Encoder
B/ 4
+5V 5
0Venc 6
0Venc
Scheme II
Encoder line driver 5V, external supply 5/24V.
SW1-1=ON,SW1-2=ON,JP1=ON Encoder inputs board
XM2
A 1 SW1-1:ON GEDEA1
A/ 2
JP1:ON
B 3 SW1-2:ON
5Venc
Encoder
B/ 4
+12/24Venc 5
0Venc 0Venc 6
0Venc
12/24V
0V
Scheme III
Encoder push pull, external supply 12/24V.
SW1-1=OFF,SW1-2=OFF,JP1=OFF Encoder inputs board
XM2
A 1 SW1-1:OFF GEDEA1
A/ 2
JP1:OFF
B 3 SW1-2:OFF
5Venc
Encoder
B/ 4
+12/24V 5
+12/24Venc
0Venc 0Venc 6
0Venc
12/24V
0V
Figure 6.3.3
IMGT10002EN 49
Options GT1000
6.3.4 First startup of the system inverter-motor-encoder

FOREWORD: STANDARD Installation.
Encoder installed on the rear part of the motor, from the opposite side of the command shaft (fig.6.3.4).
1) Exam of installation.
Supply the inverter keeping it in stand-by (terminal 10 open, message "rdy" on the display) and through the programming keys access to the
parameter Mon.02 (motor revolutions) and display its content.
Leaving stopped the encoder it should appear on the display the value "00000". turning slowly by hand the shaft of the motor clockwise
(watching the motor from the side of the shaft) you should read positive revolutions, turning it anticlockwise, negative revolutions.
Turning the encoder clockwise, the signal which enters on terminal "A" should be in advance of 90° compared to the signal entering the
terminal "B". If the revolutions read do not have the correct signal, it means that the time relations between signals A and B are inverted; you
must then perform one (and only one) of the following operations:
OPERATION 1) exchange B with B: - exchange the conductor which enters on terminal B with the one entering on terminalB
OPERATION 2) exchange B with A: - exchange the conductor which enters on terminal B with the one entering on terminal A
- exchange the conductor which enters on terminalB with the one entering on terminalA
90°
Figure 6.3.4
2) First start
Check the data Mot.01÷Mot.07 and verify their congruence with the data of the motor.
Program the operation of the GT1000 in FOC (drv.07=2) with set of revolutions from internal parameter (ex. rEF.07). Verify in Mon.08 the
setting of a speed reference well known and such not to create a danger in case the motor follows it: for example set +50rpm.
Close the enabling contact DREN (term. 10-11) provide the run command (term. 5-11).
If the motor has been connected to the inverter so that the sequence (positive) of the output phases of the inverter causes a clockwise
revolution, the speed regulator of the drive brings the motor, with the due ramp of acceleration, to rotate at the pre-set speed.
In absence of charges connected to the axis of output current, it assumes a value near to the data Mot.02.
Opening the contact 5-11 the motor stops with ramp. The system is ready for following start-up operations.
If on the contrary the terminals of the motor have been connected in a non corresponding way with the outputs of the inverter, or
the manufacturer of the motor has wired the motor itself not observing the conventional cyclic direction (sequence U, V, W Î
clockwise revolution), there are adjustment problems.
The motor rotates at a quite low speed and with an opposite signed compared to the one required and the inverter issues a very high current,
so high that the thermal protection of the motor shall intervene (the display blinks and after a certain time the inverter goes in alarm "--tH").
In this status, the simple command of STOP does not manage to stop the motor and interrupt the modulation, because the speed is
not controlled. The only command activated is the one of DREN disabling (opening of the contact 10-11).
In this case it is necessary to switch OFF the inverter (disconnect mains power supply), await the due time to allow the discharge of the
capacitors of the filter, then reverse two phases of the motor.
6.3.5 Special Applications
If you wish to work with a positive set of revolutions but the machine must turn anticlockwise:
a) reverse two phases of the motor.
b) reverse the signal of the encoder, so that when the motor turns anticlockwise, the inverter reads POSITIVE revolutions. To do so,
you may exchange the channel B with channel B or exchange the channel A with channel B. (see OPERATION 1 and OPERATION
2 chap. 6.3.4).
Encoder installed in position NON STANDARD.
In case the encoder is mounted on the command side of the motor, proceed as follows.
Turning the motor shaft anticlockwise, you should read in Mon.02 positive revolutions; if the rotation of the shaft provides negative revolutions,
exchange the channel A with the B or the B with the -B so that the signal on terminal A is 90° in advance compared to the oneon terminal B.
Connect the phases of the motor; of the group of three currents is not agreeing with the signal of the encoder and there is the situation of stall
previously described, open the contact 10-11, switch off the inverter and reverse two phases of the motor.
If you have obtained the control of the motor but you wish to work with positive revolutions anticlockwise, please consider what mentioned on items
a) and b).
50 IMGT10002EN
7 STARTUP-TEST-DISPLAY AND PROGRAMMING
7.1 Manufacturer's pre-setting
The inverter is supplied with the settings listed in the tables of the programming chapters under default. In detail:
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION PARAMETER

- Control algorithm V/F (Volt/Hertz) drv.07=1
- Mains rated voltage 400V drv.05=380
- Source 1ª speed From potentiometer (terminals 14-15) rEF.05=1
- Source 2ª speed From internal reference rEF.07 rEF.06=3
- Linear ramps 10s from 0 to 60Hz rPS.01÷16=10.0
- Motor parameters according to drv.01 Mot.01÷07
- Characteristic linear VvF.04=33.3 VvF.05=66.6
- Full voltage frequency (Fb) 50Hz VvF.02=50Hz
- Carrier 3kHz drv.06=1
- Quantity displayed on the display Output frequency (Hz) Mon.01=3
- Analog output 1 MOxTOR REVOLUTIONS Aot.01=1
- Analog output 2 (board exp) OUTPUT CURRENT AOT.04=3
- Digital output 1 (relay RL2) ZERO SPEED dot.01=3
- Digital output 2 (board exp) THRESHOLD SPEED 1 dot.02=1
- Digital output 3 (board exp) THRESHOLD SPEED 2 dot.03=2
- Digital input COM 1 INT. REFERENCES SELECTION din.03=0
- Digital input COM 2 INT. REFERENCES SELECTION din.04=1
- Digital input COM 3 Alarm reset. din.05=16
7.2 Description of the display and of the keypad
Housed on the front of the inverter there is the programming keypad, which is made up by:
♦ the display unit made up by: ♦ the keyboard made up by:
five displays with 7 segments three basic keys
three auxiliary LEDs: ON, FAULT, RUN. MODE UP, UP, DOWN
And seven auxiliary keys

MODE DW, MAN/Start, AUTO, STOP,
the 3 auxiliary LEDs mean respectively: RESET , Canc/Enter, SHIFT
Green LED (ON):
inverter fed.
Green LED (ON) blinking:
Inverter operating in LOCAL mode (MAN)
Red LED (FAULT):

inverter protected.
Yellow LED (RUN): inverter operating.

Yellow LED (RUN) blinking: inverter fed in
braking phase.
Figure 7.1
Startup-test-display and programming GT1000
Keys UP and DOWN 1) they scroll the list of the families of parameters (Mon, drv, Mot, …)
2) they scroll the list of parameters within a family (For ex.: drv.01, drv.02, drv.03, …)
: 3) they modify the value of a parameter
4) they modify the speed reference in LOCAL operation mode.
5) they can become UP/DOWN push-buttons for the motor potentiometer function
Key MODE UP 1) one goes from level "display" to level "families"
2) one goes from level "families" to level "parameters"
: 3) one goes from level "parameters " to level "parameters value"
4) one returns to level "families"
Key MAN/Start : 1. Let the operation mode be modified from REMOTE (commands from terminal board) to
LOCAL (commands and reference from keypad). The confirmation must occur using the key
ENTER within 3 seconds. It is not enabled with operating inverter. The modificationtion to the
LOCAL mode is signaled by the blonking of the green LED (ON). This function can be avoided
by programming rLo.18=1
2. In LOCAL operationmode, this key becomes directly the command of RUN. In V/Hz operation
mode, it works together with UP or DOWN: MAN + UP = RUN FW MAN + DOWN = RUN RV
Once the RUN command is given, the reference can be immediately modified using the key UP or
the key DOWN. In V/Hz operation mode the minimum settable value is Vvf.17 + 0,1Hz; the
maximum value is limited by Mot.19 or by Mot.20 according to the rotation direction.
3. If during operation in LOCAL mode the keypad disconnects from the inverter, the control
removes the eventually given RUN command and performs the ramp stop without signaling
any alarm. The reference remains set.
Key AUTO It let the operation go back from LOCAL mode (commands and/or reference from keypad) to
REMOTE (commands and reference from terminal board). The confirmation must occur by
using the key ENTER within 3 seconds. It is not enabled, when the inverter is in RUN. This
:
procedure zeroes the reference eventually set in a previous operation in LOCAL mode.
1) Command of STOP from local.

Key STOP: :
1) Command of protections RESET (always enabled).

Key RESET :
Combination of the keys
1. It allows the acquisition of some "special" parameters by means of a software reset of the
inverter (for example the carrier or the motor rated current). By doing this, one avoids to switch
SHIFT and RESET off and re-start the inverter. It is not enabled with the inverter in RUN. The same action is
obtained by applying the procedure descirbed in par. 7.4
(prolonged pressure):
In the operation in REMOTE mode, i.e. with commands and reference coming form terminal board, the keypad can be removed and the
inverter keeps it functionality.
The three LED present on the control board replicate the indications of the three LED presnet on the keypad as long as this remains
connected. Should one disconnect it, the three LED of the control board keep the previous functions only if no protection is tripped. Should a
protection trip, the red LED stops to be switched off anf starts either with a fixed or with a blinking light. The other two LEDs change their
behaviour and, together with the red LED, indicate the lock cause. The following table allows to understand from the green-red-yellow LED
combination the nature of the occurred alarm. The lighted red LED indicates the tripping of an “important” protection related to hardware
functions. The red blinking LED indicates protections of different type.
Protection -dOC --OC --OU --OH --UU --UUS -HArd -t-SL -ErPF --tH
Green LED z { z { Ñ{Ò { Ñ{Ò z { z
Red LED z z z z z z z Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò
Yellow LED z z { { { Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò z z {
Protection --cL -ErFn -Enc- --OUS -I-PF --Et -Ptc- -O-SP -EEPr
Green LED Ñ{Ò { z Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò { { { {
Red LED Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò
Yellow LED { Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò z Ñ{Ò { { { {
LED Codification: {= switched off LED, Ñ{Ò= blinking LED, z= switched on LED
Should the keypad be connected again, the three LEDs of the control board start again to replicate the three LEDs of the keypad and on this
latter, in case of tripped protection, there is the explicit indication of the lock cause. The complete description of all protections and modes of
cause removal are described in paragraph 7.9 of this chapter.
GT1000 Startup-test-display and programming
7.3 Structure and modification of the parameters
At start, the inverter assumes by default the Monitor configuration.

If the terminal 10 is closed, the output frequency in Hz is displayed.
By pressing the key MODE UP once, one gets access the Functions list, i.e.:
Mon (=Monitor), din (=digital input programmer)
drv (=Identification of the Drive) S-L (=Serial connection)
Mot (=Identification of the motor) Sod (=Organization outputs on serial)
rEF (=Treatment of the speed ref.) Sid (=Organization inputs from serial)
rPS (=Ramps) diA (=selector for auxiliary quantities)
VvF (=V/Hz Characteristic) FLo (=Function enabling)
rEv (=speed regulator) Fn1 (=Motor potentiometer)
rEc (=torque regulator) Fn2 (=Restart)
rEL (=internal tuning regulators) Fn3 (=Reset)
rLo (=special enabling) Fn4 (=Ref. in frequency/encoder)
Aot (=analog output selector) Fn5 (=Kinetic recovery)
Ain (=analog input selector) Fn6 (=PID general purpose)
dot (=logic output selector) Fn7 (=Miscellany 1)
PMP (=pumps)
• By pressing the keys UP or DOWN one scrolls the function list: Mon__, ......., rEV__, ......, Fn6__.
• By pressing the key MODE a second time, one gets access into the parameter list of that function:
• By pressing the keys UP or DOWN one scrolls the list of those parameters: For ex. drv.01, ......., drv.08
• By pressing the key MODE a third time, one reads the value of the previously selected parameter.
• If the parameter is not a read-only parameter (if it is not a display quantity) it is possible to modify it by acting on the keys UP (increases) and
DOWN (decreases).
• By pressing the key MODE a fourth time one goes back to the Monitor configuration.
• The return to the Monitor position occurs also automatically (5 seconds) if not any key is pressed, exception made for the display-only
parameters: Mon.xx, for which the return to the default display occurs only by pressing the key MODE
The prolonged pressure (t > 1s) of the key UP (DOWN) allows the "rapid" scrolling of the list of parameters or the “rapid” increase (decrease) of the
parameter value (unless it is not a display-only parameter).
This is explained also in the diagram given in the following figure representing the “MENU STRUCTURE”:
Monitor
parameters
Drive parameters
(drv)
drv.01
Motor parameters
(Mot) 13
drv.02
drv.03 21
Function 7
parameters
(Fn7)
54
drv.08
Parameter
Pump applications value level
(PMP) Parameter level
Family level
Figure 7.3 Menu structure
7.3.1 Example of programming
If one wishes to configure the logic output 1 (RL2: terminals 3-4) as “zero speed relay”
OPERATION KEYPAD DISPLAY REMARKS
Terminals 10-11 open Rdy GT1000 ready (rdy), not enabled
Terminals 10-11 closed 0000.0 Output frequency GT1000 enabled
MODE One gets access to the list of parameter families
Mon… Using the push-buttons
UP drv… UP and DOWN
DOWN …… one selects the family
dot… dot
MODE One gets access to the parameter list
UP Using the push-buttons UP and DOWN
DOWN dot.01 one selects the parameter dot.01
MODE One gets access to the parameter value
1 Using the push-buttons
UP
2 UP and DOWN
DOWN
3 one selects 3
5 seconds
0000.0 After 5 sec. one goes back to the output frequency display
7.4 Storage of the protected parameters (without switch-off and re-start)
Some parameters of the GT1000 (highlighted in 1) one sets rLo.01 on the value 1
the parameter tables by the symbol ) once they 2) one opens the terminal 10 (Drive Enable)
have been modified are effectively acquired only 3) on brings the inverter back to the zero status (the display shows "rdy")
by switching off and restarting the inverter, or by 4) one holds the key DOWN (only and exclusively that key) for about 2 seconds.
opening the terminal 10 (DREN) and by pressing At this point, the inverter performs a software reset adding the set of modified
contemporaneously for some seconds the keys parameters. The logic rLo.01 goes back automatically to the zero value. Then,
SHIFT and RESET, or by applying the following everything goes on as usual.
procedure:
7.4.1 Parameter modification lock/unlock (PASSWORD)
Should one wish to avoid access to the modification of the parameters by non-authorized personnel set rLo.02 = 1. At this point, all
parameters (drv.03 excluded) are enabled only to reading.
To gain again access to the modification of the parameters it is necessary to enter in drv.03 the value read in Mon.21 (this value varies
randomly at each restart of the inverter).
To lock again the parameter modification switch off and restart the inverter or modify the value of drv.03 so that it differs from Mon.21.
To remove the parameter modification lock it is necessary, after having set drv.03=Mon.21, to configure rLo.02=0.
7.4.2 “LOCAL” mode lock/unlock
Should one wish to avoid the possibility to control the inverter by means of the keypad by non-authorized personnel, the switch to the LOCAL
mode can be locked (key MAN) by programming rLo.18=1. At this point, even by pressing the key MAN, the inverter does not accept
commands from the keypad, which remains therefore active only for the display or the modification of the parameters.
To restore the LOCAL mode, it is enough to re-set rLo.18 on 0.
7.5 First start
7.5.1 First start from keypad
By means of the keypad it is possible to perform a first rapid start of the GT1000, by setting the operation in “LOCAL” mode:
OPERATION KEY/TERMINAL DISPLAY REMARKS

Feed the inverter rdy Inverter ready
The inverter is by default in
rdy (drv.07=1)
Volt/Hertz configuration (V/F)
Pre-set the inverter for the Press the key MAN / START and confirm with
Man The green LED blinks
operation in LOCAL mode the key ENTER
Enable the inverter Close the contact 10-11 0000.0 The inverter is enabled
Press the keys MAN/START and UP The inverter supplies the minimum
RUN forwards 0000.5
simultaneously frequency (Vvf.17)
Using the key UP it is possible to increase The motor follows in ramp the
Set the output frequency 0050.0
frequency up to the maximum value set in Mot.19 reference set in Hz
using the key DOWN it is possible to decrease The motor follows in ramp the
Set the output frequency 0000.5
frequency up to the minimum value set in Vvf.17 reference set in Hz
Press the keys MAN/START and DOWN The motor inverts the rotation
RUN backwards -050.0
simultaneously direction
The motor ramps down until it
STOP Press the key STOP 0000.0
stops
Disable the inverter Open the contact 10-11 rdy Inverter in stand-by
If during the operation in LOCAL mode the keypad should be disconnected from the inverter, the control removes the eventually given
command of RUN and performs ramp stop without signaling any alarm. The reference set remains stored.
7.5.2 Rapid commissioning
1) For a rapid parameterization follow the instruction given in the previous paragraphs of this chapter.
2) For a rapid commissioning follow these instructions:
a. Access the family drive (drv.xx) and set:
For V/F: drv.07=1
For FOC vectorial: drv.07=2
b. Set the mains rated voltage: drv.05
c. Verify the programming according to the following data:
PARAMETERS TABLE PAGES
V/F:
Mot.01-07-19-20-(21) 7.7-3 7-23
This involves the
VvF.01-02-03 7.7-6 7-29
following parameters
and paragraphs: rEc.01-02-03 7.7-8 7-33
PARAMETERS TABLE PAGES

FOC:
Mot.xx 7.7-3 7-23
This involves the
rEv.xx 7.7-7 7-32
following parameters
and paragraphs: rEc.xx 7.7-8 7-33
rEL.xx 7.7-9 7-37
REFERENCES and PARAMETERS TABLE PAGES

RAMPS: rEF.xx 7.7-4 7-25
This involves the rPS.xx 7.7-5 7-28
following parameters FLo.01 7.7-19 7-48
and paragraphs: Fn1.xx 7.7-20 7-49
TERMINAL BOARD PARAMETERS TABLE PAGES

START/STOP: din.xx 7.7-14 7-44
This involves the
following parameters ain.xx 7.7-12 7-41
and paragraphs: dot.xx 7.7-13 7-43
d. perform a software reset according to par. 7.4 of the this volume.
NB: The terminals COM1, COM2, and COM3 (7/8/9) are configured by means of the parameters din.03÷05 (chapter 7.7).
7.6 Restoration of the manufacturer’s settings
Should it be necessary, to restore all manufacturer's settings, 1) FEED THE INVERTER

proceed as follows: 2) SET THE PARAMETER rLo.01=1
3) SET THE PARAMETER rLo.06=dEF
4) SWITCH OFF AND RE-START THE INVERTER.
7.7 Parameter tables
In the tables some parameters are associated to one of the following symbols:
- The symbol indicates a parameter expressly dedicated to the Volt /Hz control (V/F).
- The symbol Q indicates a parameter expressly dedicated to the Field Oriented control (FOC).
Where these are not present, the parameter has to be considered of generic use.
- The symbol indicates a parameter whose effective acquisition occurs at software reset, therefore by switching off and re-starting the inverter
or by following the procedure described at chapter 7.4.
Table 7.7-1 Parameters of Monitor (Monitor Parameters) (page 65)

Serial Ind. No. PARAMETER DESCRIPTION UNIT MIN. MAX. DEFAULT
201 Mon.01 Default display selector 2 21 3
181 Mon.02 Motor revolutions (N) RPM
182 Mon.03 Output frequency (Hz)
183 Mon.04 Output current A
184 Mon.05 Thermal protection counter %
185 Mon.06 Capacitor voltage (DC BUS) V
186 Mon.07 Ref. frequency/revolutions (No) Hz/RPM
187 Mon.08 Ref. selected before of the ramp Hz/RPM
188 Mon.09 Ref. freq./revolutions from serial Hz/RPM
189 Mon.10 Torque ref. (Tqo) %
190 Mon.11 Torque feedback (Tq) %
191 Mon.12 Power measure %
192 Mon.13 Aux1
193 Mon.14 Aux2
194 Mon.15 Word Protection (not active)
195 Mon.16 Word Status (////////)
196 Mon.17 Word Command (////////)
197 Mon.18 Last ten alarms
198 Mon.19 Operation hour counter
199 Mon.20 Module temperature measure
200 Mon.21 Password to be inserted on modification key
Table 7.7-2 drv.xx inverter identification parameters (Drive Parameter) (see page 67)
Serial Ind. No. PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION UNIT MIN. MAX. DEFAULT CURRENT
202 drv.01 Inverter type t_003 t_258
179 drv.02 Software release 00.00
180 drv.03 Modification key input 0 99
203 drv.04 Optional interface language 0 5 0 (ITA)
1 drv.05 Mains rated voltage V 300 500 380
204 drv.06 Carrier 1 4 1
205 drv.07 Control selection 1 3 1
280 drv.08 Undervoltage protection tolerance % 15 25 15
Table 7.7-3 Mot.xx motor-inverter coupling parameters (Motor Parameters) (see page 68)
Serial param.
PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION UNIT MIN. MAX. DEFAULT CURRENT
No.
2 Mot.01 Motor rated current A 0.5 2000.0 f(drv.01)
3 Mot.02 Q Idle motor current A 0.3 1000.0 f(drv.01)
4 Mot.03 Q Rated frequency Hz 10.0 200.0 50.0
5 Mot.04 Q Motor rated speed RPM 100 6000 f(drv.01)
6 Mot.05 Q Motor rated voltage V 150 500 380
7 Mot.06 Q Motor rated power kW 0.3 500.0 f(drv.01)
206 Mot.07 Cosϕ 0.50 0.95 0.80
207 Mot.08 Q /
8 Mot.09 Q Stator resistance mΩ 0 5000 0
9 Mot.10 Q /
10 Mot.11 Q /
11 Mot.12 Q /
12 Mot.13 Q /
13 Mot.14 Q /
14 Mot.15 Q /
15 Mot.16 Q /
16 Mot.17 Q /
17 Mot.18 /
Revolutions/Hertz
140/18 Mot.19 RPM/Hz 0/0.1 6000/480.0 1500/50.0
maximum positive
Revolutions/Hertz -6000/ -1500/
141/19 Mot.20 RPM/Hz 0/-0.1
maximum negative -480.0 -50.0
208 Mot.21 Number of poles 2 24 4
REMARK With the V/F control it is necessary to set only the parameters Mot.01, Mot.07, Mot.19, and Mot.20.
Table 7.7-4 rEF.xx Speed reference parameters (References) (see page 70)
Serial param.
PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION UNIT MIN MAX DEFAULT CURRENT
No.
20/124 rEF.01 First analog ref. full-scale Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 50.0/1500
21/125 rEF.02 First analog ref. scale start Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 0.1/-1500
22/126 rEF.03 Second analog ref. full-scale Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 50.0/1500
23/127 rEF.04 Second analog ref. scale start Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 0.1/-1500
209 rEF.05 First speed ref. selector 1 8 1
210 rEF.06 Second speed ref. selector 1 8 3
24/128 rEF.07 Speed digital reference 1 Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 0.1/0
211 rEF.15 Selector sum on selected ref. 1 4 1
32/136 rEF.16 % on reference sum % -200.0 +200.0 0.0
33/137 rEF.17 First tripping threshold Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 0.1/0
34 rEF.18 Second tripping threshold Hz/RPM 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 0.1/0
267/269 rEF.19 Zero band Hz/RPM 0.1/ 5 5.0/ 50 0.5/ 50
268/270 rEF.20 Speed band reached Hz/RPM 0.1/ 5 5.0/ 50 0.5/ 50
Table 7.7-5 rPS.xx Ramp parameters (Ramps) (see page 73)
Param serial No. PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION UNIT MIN MAX DEFAULT CURRENT
35 rPS.01 Acceleration ramp 1 s* 0.1 2000.0 10.0
43 rPS.09 Deceleration ramp 1 s** 0.1 2000.0 10.0
212 rPS.17 Parameter S-curve(***) 0 200 0
(*) Time in seconds to reach 60Hz (V/F) or 1800 RPM (FOC).
(**) Time in seconds to decrease from 60Hz (V/F) or 1800 RPM (FOC) to zero.
(***) Not available in the basic version
Table 7.7-6 VvF.xx V/F Characteristic Parameters (see page 74)

Serial Ind. No. PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION UNIT MIN MAX DEFAULT CURRENT
213 VvF.01 Voltage gain % 50 100 100
51 VvF.02 Full voltage frequency (Fb) Hz 30.0 480.0 50.0
214 VvF.03 Voltage compensation % 30 100 100
52 VvF.04 Voltage at 1/3 Fb % 10.0 50.0 33.3
53 VvF.05 Voltage at 2/3 Fb % 20.0 90.0 66.6
215 VvF.06 Booster % 0.0 20.0 0.0
216 VvF.07 Automatic booster % 0.0 20.0 0.0
54 VvF.08 Blocked rotor tripping frequency Hz 0.0 20.0 0.0
217 VvF.09 Blocked rotor level % 0.0 20.0 0.0
55 VvF.10 Blocked rotor time s 0.0 20.0 0.0
56 VvF.11 Minimum frequency Hz 0.1 5.0 0.5
57 VvF.12 Start waiting time s 0.0 10.0 0.0
58 VvF.13 Frequency hopping amplitude Hz 0.3 5.0 0.3
59 VvF.14 Frequency hopping 1 Hz 0.0 480.0 0.0
62 VvF.17 Stop frequency Hz 0.1 5.0 0.5
218 VvF.18 Prop. Compensation Iout F 0.0 4.0 0.0
110 VvF.19 Constant filter Iout for Iout F Hz 3.0 75.0 5.0
221 VvF.20 Stall reduction constant 0 10 4
Table 7.7-7 rEv.xx FOC speed regulator (see page 78)

63 rEv.01Q 1st speed reg. proportional gain 0 8000 2000
64 rEv.02Q 1st speed reg. integral gain 0 650 50
65 rEv.03Q 1st speed reg. derivative gain 0 650 0
66 rEv.04Q Gain commutation revolution threshold RPM 100 6000 6000
67 rEv.05Q 2nd speed reg. proportional gain 0 8000 2000
68 rEv.06Q 2nd speed reg. integral gain 0 650 50
69 rEv.07Q 2nd speed reg. derivative gain 0 650 0
220 rEv.08 Sliding compensation 0.0 10.0 0.0
70 rEv.09Q Posit. compliance threshold % 0.0 20.0 0.0
71 rEv.10Q Posit. compliance coefficient % 0.0 20.0 0.0
72 rEv.11Q Neg. compliance coefficient % 0.0 20.0 0.0
Table 7.7-8 rEc.xx Torque regulator parameters (see page 79)

73 rEc.01 Positive torque limit % 10 180 150
74 rEc.02 Negative torque limit % -150 -10 -150
75 rEc.03 thermal protection level % 30 105 105
76 rEc.04 Current limit during acc. f< Fb % 1 100 100
77 rEc.05 Current limit during acc. f> Fb % 1 100 100
78 rEc.06 Current limit at normal operation % 1 100 100
271 rEc.07 Torque limits adjustment (Icosϕ) % 50 150 107
222 rEc.08Q Torque ref. source selection 1 6 1
223 rEc.09Q Torque limits limitation mode selection 1 5 1
224 rEc.10Q Torque additional term selection 1 6 1
79 rEc.11Q Internal torquel reference % -150 150 0
Table 7.7-9 rEL.xx Parameters of internal regulators (see page 83)

80 rEL.01Q Current ring gain correction % -100 100 0
81 rEL.02Q Flow ring integral gain corr. (ID) -10 10 0
82 rEL.03Q Flow ring proportional gain corr. (ID) 0 20 0
83 rEL.04Q Torque ring integral gain corr. (IQ) -20 20 0
84 rEL.05Q Torque ring proportional gain cor. (IQ) 0 20 0
85 rEL.06Q Flow forward feed gain 0 100 0
86 rEL.07Q Torque forward feed gain 0 100 0
87 rEL.08Q Rotor time constant calibration (TTR) 0 100 0
252 rEL.09Q Reserved
253 rEL.10 Dead times compensation (reserved) -27 +27 0
115 rEL.11 Compensation ACT_IPC (reserved) -200 +200 0
Table 7.7-10 rLo.xx Various internal enabling commands (see page 84)
321 rLo.01 Unlock rLo.06 0 1 0
322 rLo.02 It disables access key 0 1 0
323 rLo.03 Q See remarks paragraph 5.1 0 1 0
326 rLo.06 Restoration by default values Curr. dEF. Curr.
327 rLo.07 Q Disabling reset (FO) 0 1 1
328 rLo.08 Mains sensor disabling (***) 0 1 0
329 rLo.09 OUS protection disabling 0 1 1
330 rLo.10 Motor thermal protection disabling 0 1 0
331 rLo.11 Motor thermal protection type 0 1 1
332 rLo.12 /
333 rLo.13 Motor revolutions displays (V/F) 0 1 0
334 rLo.14 Enabl. deceleration in voltage limit 0 1 0
335 rLo.15 Q Enabl. “ENCODER tear off” 0 1 0
336 rLo.16 Q Enabl. encoder test 0 1 0
337 rLo.17 References source selection in local mode 0 1 0
415 rLo.18 Commands lock in “LOCAL" mode 0 1 0
(***) The mains sensor must be disconnected in the inverter with DC BUS configuration.
Table 7.7-11 Aot.xx Analog outputs configuration (see page 86)

225 Aot.01 Selector of analog output 1 1 16 1
88 Aot.02 Offset of analog output 1 bit -127 127 0
89 Aot.03 Gain of analog output 1 % 50.0 200.0 100.0
226 Aot.04 Selector of analog output 2 1 16 3
90 Aot.05 Offset of analog output 2 bit -127 127 0
91 Aot.06 Gain of analog output 2 % 50.0 200.0 100.0
116 Aot.07 PWM calibration record bit -255 255 0
257 Aot.08 Configuration of analog output 1 -2 2 1
258 Aot.09 Configuration of analog output 2 -2 2 1
Table 7.7-12 Ain.xx Analog inputs configuration (see page 87)

92 Ain.01 Offset of analog 1 -100 100 0
93 Ain.02 Gain of analog 1 % 50.0 150.0 100.0
227 Ain.03 Filter of analog 1 0 6 1
94 Ain.04 Offset of analog 2 -100 100 0
95 Ain.05 Gain of analog 2 % 50.0 150.0 100.0
228 Ain.06 Filter of analog 2 0 6 1
96 Ain.07 Not used
97 Ain.08 Not used
229 Ain.09 Not used
98 Ain.10 Not used
99 Ain.11 Not used
230 Ain.12 Not used
243 Ain.13 Analog 1 configuration selection 1 7 1
244 Ain.14 Analog 2 configuration selection 1 7 1
264 Ain.15 Configuration V/mA analog 1 1 3 1
265 Ain.16 Configuration V/mA analog 2 1 3 1
266 Ain.17 Enabling protection loss 4÷20mA 0 1 0
105 Ain.18 PTC/NTC Threshold alarm V 0.00 10.00 5.00
106 Ain.19 PTC/NTC protection threshold V 0.00 10.00 7.50
Table 7.7-13 dot.xx Digital outputs configuration (see page 88)

231 dot.01 Selector of digital output 1 (relay RL2) 0 13 3
232 dot.02 Selector of digital output 2 (on EXP.) 0 13 1
233 dot.03 Selector of digital output 3 (on EXP.) 0 13 2
402 dot.04 Inversion of digital output 1 0 1 0
Table 7.7-14 din.xx Digital inputs configuration and Logic Bits (see page 89)
Selector logic bit RIFIN1 (only from command
234 din.01 0 31 31
serial: bit2 word commands)
Selector logic bit RIFIN2 (only from command
235 din.02 0 31 31
serial: bit3 word commands)
236 din.03 Selector Input COM1 0 31 0
237 din.04 Selector Input COM2 0 31 1
238 din.05 Selector Input COM3 0 31 16 (reset)
Table 7.7-15 S-L.xx Serial configuration parameters (Serial link) (see page 90)
239 S-L.01 Protocol selection 1 6 1
339 S-L.02 Serial communication enabling 0 1 1
340 S-L.03 Selection of commands mode from serial 0 1 0
341 S-L.04 Reserved 0 0 0
342 S-L.05 Presetting RS485HD(=1)/RS232(=0) 0 1 1
347 S-L.10 BCC Enabling 0 1 1

348 S-L.11 Parity Enabling 0 1 0
240 S-L.12 Baud rate Bd 600 9600 9600
241 S-L.13 Inverter address 0 32 1
242 S-L.14 Selection PPO (Profibus) 1 5 2
351 S-L.15 Display selection on Mon.16 0 1 0
352 S-L.16 Profibus emergency commands 0 1 0
Table 7.7-16 Sod.xx Serial out configuration parameters (Serial Output Data) (see page 91)
353 Sod.01 Motor revolutions (N) 0 1 0
354 Sod.02 Output frequency (Hz) 0 1 0
355 Sod.03 Output current 0 1 0
356 Sod.04 Thermal protection counter 0 1 0
357 Sod.05 Capacitor voltage (DC BUS) 0 1 0
358 Sod.06 Speed / freq. ref. (No) 0 1 0
359 Sod.07 Set Ref. (N40) 0 1 0
360 Sod.08 Speed / freq. ref. from serial 0 1 0
361 Sod.09 Torque ref. (Tqo) 0 1 0
362 Sod.10 Torque feedback (Tq) 0 1 0
363 Sod.11 Power measure 0 1 0
364 Sod.12 Aux1 0 1 0
365 Sod.13 Aux2 0 1 0
366 Sod.14 Word Protection 0 1 0
367 Sod.15 Word Status 0 1 0
368 Sod.16 / 0 1 0
Table 7.7-17 Sid.xx Parameters configuration in serial (Serial Input Data) (see page 91)
369 Sid.01 Command 1 1 1
370 Sid.02 Speed/frequency reference 0 1 0
371 Sid.03 Term in speed/freq. ref. sum 0 1 0
372 Sid.04 Upper torque limit 0 1 0
373 Sid.05 Lower torque limit 0 1 0
374 Sid.06 Torque reference 0 1 0
375 Sid.07 Term in torque ref. sum 0 1 0
376 Sid.08 Prop. PID 0 1 0
377 Sid.09 Integral PID 0 1 0
378 Sid.10 Derivative PID 0 1 0
379 Sid.11 Aux1 0 1 0
380 Sid.12 Aux2 0 1 0
381 Sid.13 Command 1 0 1 0
382 Sid.14 Ramp 0 1 0
383 Sid.15 / 0 1 0
384 Sid.16 / 0 1 0
Table 7.7-18 diA.xx Diagnostic configuration: auxiliary word/bit (Diagnostics) (see page 92)
281 diA.01 Selector for Aux1 1 16 3
282 diA.02 Selector for Aux2 1 16 4
283 diA.03 Selector for Auxb0 1 15 1
284 diA.04 Selector for Auxb1 1 15 1
Table 7.7-19 FLo.xx Auxiliary functions enabling (Enable Function logic bit) (see page 93)
385 FLo.01 Motor potentiometer enabling 0 1 0
386 FLo.02 Enabling of restart with speed-search 0 1 0
387 FLo.03 Reset enabling 0 1 0
388 FLo.04 Enabl. tracking from encoder (*) 0 1 0
389 FLo.05 Enabling kinetic recovery 0 1 0
390 FLo.06 Enabling PID 0 1 0
391 FLo.07 / 0 1 0
392 FLo.08 Enabl. function “Motor pause” 0 1 0
393 FLo.09 Q Enabl. function “Screwer” 0 1 0
394 FLo.10 Enabl. function “Auxiliary pumps” 0 1 0
395 FLo.11 /
396 FLo.12 /
397 FLo.13 /
398 FLo.14 /
399 FLo.15 /
400 FLo.16 Enabl. function “Speed profile” 0 1 0
(*) Only special applications with board II encoder (GEDEA)
Table 7.7-20 Fn1.xx Motor potentiometer (see page 94

Serial Ind.
No.
100 Fn1.01 Motor potentiometer ramp 1 6 1
101/138 Fn1.02 Final value 100% (Hz/RPM) % 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 50.0/1500
102/139 Fn1.03 Start value 0% (Hz/RPM) % 0.1/-6000 480.0/6000 0.6/-1500
103 Fn1.04 Current motor potentiometer value % 0.0 100.0 0.0
278 Fn1.05 Enabl. loss management 4-20mA 0 1 0
338 Fn1.08 Origin of commands UP/DOWN 0 1 0
349 Fn1.09 Storage yes/no 0 1 0
350 Fn1.10 Restart from zero on DREN 0 1 0
Table 7.7-21 Fn2.xx Flight restart (see page 96)

Serial Ind.
No.
104 Fn2.01 Search frequency ramp 2 20 4
245 Fn2.02 Voltage output ms 0 5 1
246 Fn2.03 Wait locking occurred ms 10 100 40
247 Fn2.04 Voltage reduction during search % 10 70 20
248 Fn2.05 Demagnetization waiting time s 0.0 2.0 1.0
401 Fn2.09 Speed search procedure selection 0 1 0
Table 7.7-22 Fn3.xx Auto Reset (see page 98)

Serial Ind.
No.
255 Fn3.05 Alarm reset pause s 1 30 1
405 Fn3.09 Auto-reset for UU / all protections 0 1 0
Table 7.7-23 Fn4.xx Speed Reference from frequency signal (with “GEDEA”board only (IInd encoder): (see page 97)
Serial Ind.
No.
254 Fn4.01 Q Time constant of low pass digital filter - 1 5 4
112 Fn4.02 Q Gain % -300.00 300.00 100.00
219 Fn4.03 Q Offset rpm -100 100 0
113 Fn4.04 Q Speed reference correction % 0.0 100.0 0.0
114 Fn4.05 Q Adding term rpm 0 500 0
Table 7.7-24 Fn5.xx Kinetic recovery (see page 101)

Serial Ind.
No.
272 Fn5.01 Start step Hz 0,0 20,0 0,5
143 Fn5.02 DC BUS reference voltage Vdc 500 820 690
144 Fn5.03 Braking voltage during recovery Vdc 600 800 680
146 Fn5.05 Guide ramp s 1,2 800,0 2,0
273 Fn5.07 Mains sensor buffer length / 1 50 30
274 Fn5.08 Mains sensor sensitivity in Volt V 5 55 18
275 Fn5.09 Sensor sw. cycles insensitiveness 1 50 3
149 Fn5.10 Proportional gain / 0 8000 100
150 Fn5.11 Initial integral gain / 0 650 4
151 Fn5.12 Final integral gain / 0 650 40
Table 7.7-25 Fn6.xx PID Function (see page 103)

Serial Ind.
No.
260 Fn6.01 PID reference selection (set point) 1 5 1
261 Fn6.02 PID feedback selection 1 6 6
117 Fn6.03 PID maximum error % 0.1 100.0 100.0
262 Fn6.04 PID updating time s 0 4 0
118 Fn6.05 Gain P % 0.00 250.00 2.00
119 Fn6.06 Constant of integral time Ti s 0.1 600.0 6.0
120 Fn6.07 Constant of derivative time Td s 0.0 300.0 0
121 Fn6.08 H feedback % 50.0 250.0 100.0
122 Fn6.09 PID tripping threshold for relay R5 % -250.0 250.0 0.0
123 Fn6.10 Internal PID reference % 0.0 200.0 0.0
409 Fn6.11 Regulated quantity V or f 0 0 0
410 Fn6.12 Error inversion 0 1 0
411 Fn6.13 Regulation on f or df 0 1 0
412 Fn6.14 PID positive output suppression 0 1 0
413 Fn6.15 PID negative output suppression 0 1 0
148 Fn6.16 PID display full-scale 1 6000 1000
256 Fn6.18 Integral term limitation % 5 128 60
Table 7.7-26 Fn7.xx: Miscellany 1 (see page 106)

Serial Ind.
No.
Fn7.01-06 Not used
263 Fn7.07 Q Tightening torque source selector / 0 1 0
111 Fn7.08 Q Tightening torque % 0.00 180.00 100.00
259 Fn7.09 Macro Enabling /
249 Fn7.10 Voltage reduction ramp s 0.01 1.00 0.50
250 Fn7.11 Voltage return ramp s 0.01 1.00 0.50
251 Fn7.12 Reduced voltage gain % 50.0 100.0 100.0
142 Fn7.13 Output current threshold (bit R8) % 0.0 250.0 100.0
Table 7.7-27 PMP.xx: Pumps management (see page 111)

Serial Ind.
No.
152 PMP.01 Switching-on pressure % 10.0 100.0 90.0
285 PMP.02 2nd pump switching-on wait / 1 250 5
153 PMP.03 Switching-off pressure % 100.0 180.0 110.0
286 PMP.04 2nd pump switching-off wait s 1 250 5
277 PMP.05 Number of pumps / 1 2 1
287 PMP.06 Switching-off current threshold % 1 95 40
154 PMP.07 Restart pressure % 5.0 100.0 80.0
155 PMP.08 Pause time s 0 300 10
156 PMP.09 Pre-pause PID reference % 0.0 200.0 115.0
7.8 Description of parameters
7.8.1 Monitor
In monitor operation mode, by default, it is shown on the display the output frequency (Mon.03).
The quantity that one wishes to display is selected using parameter Mon.01.
PARAMETER Mon.01 Function Field Default
Displayed quantity It selects the default display mode 3
selector
2 Mon.02
3 Mon.03
4 Mon.04
... ...
21 Mon.21
motor revolutions (N). it displays the motor revolutions in RPM. 0 ÷ ±6000RPM
Using the algorithm V/F without speed feedback, by setting on Mot.21 the number of poles, it displays in Mon.02
REMARK the speed equal to the commanded frequency.
120
Mon.02 = Output freq. ⋅ = synchronous revol.
Mot.21
If Mot.21 = 4 and the frequency is = 50 Hz, Mon.02 should display a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.
Using the algorithm V/F and with present encoder, by setting rLo.13=1 the actual motor revolutions are displayed.
output frequency It displays the output frequency of the inverter. 0 ÷ ±480.0Hz
output current It displays in Ampere the root-mean-square value of the motor current.

accumulator I⋅t. * 0 ÷ 100%
* FUNCTION (FOC): It displays the content of the register performing the thermal timing.
With rEc.03=105% the accumulator starts to increase when the motor rated current set in Mot.01 is exceeded
of 5%; When the value 100 is reached, the inverter locks and the protection "--th" is signaled.
* FUNCTION (V/F): It displays the content of the register performing the thermal timing.
With rEc.03=105% the accumulator starts to increase when the inverter rated current of 5%; When the value
100 is reached, the inverter and the protection "--th" is signaled.
capacitor voltage. it displays in Volt the voltage of the DC BUS (voltage on capacitor Vc): 0 ÷ 1000V
Vc = V line⋅ 1.41 (inverter not loaded)

reference in it displays in Hz/RPM the reference of acting frequency/speed. The range is
frequency/revolutions limited between
downstream the ramps Mot.19 and
(No). Mot.20.
frequency it displays in Hz/RPM the frequency reference/speed set. The range is
reference/revolutions limited between
(N40) upstream the Mot.19 and
ramps Mot.20.
speed it displays in Hz/RPM the frequency reference/speed required by the The range is
reference/frequency serial line. limited between
from serial line Mot.19 and Mot.20
torque reference it displays, in % on the motor rated torque, the final torque request. (-300% ÷ 300%).
torque feedback it displays, in % on the motor rated torque, the estimate of supplied (-300% ÷ 300%).
torque.

supplied power it displays, in % of the motor rated power, the estimate of supplied (-300% ÷ 300%).
power.
auxiliary variable it displays the auxiliary variable assigned to AUX1 by means of diA.01. PID Set-point
AUX1. (engineer. unit)
auxiliary variable it displays the auxiliary variable assigned to AUX2 by means of diA.02. PID feedback
AUX2. (engineer. unit)
WORD protections. it displays the word “protections” (not active) 00000
WORD status. it displays the status of the commands. 00000
REMARK This is a read-only parameter. According to the parameter S-L.15 it can have two different meanings. With S-L.15=0
it is the status of the command terminals (hardware) of the inverter. Instead, with S-L.15=1 it is the logic OR between
the terminals and the commands coming form the serial line (DRIVE ENABLE excluded, being in AND). The
codification is as follows:
RUN/FW DRIVE
COM2 FL/RV
COM3
COM1 RIFIN1 RESET
RIFIN2 DRIV.ENABLE
PARAMETER MON.17 Function Field Default

WORD command it displays the word commands coming from serial line in 0000
hexadecimal format .
Last 10 protections It contains, coded, the list of the last 10 protections tripped. By See paragraph 7.9 on the No-al
tripped holding the key DOWN they can be scrolled in reverse time description of the protections.
order.
INVERTER RUNNING It displays the hours of actual running (start command active). 00000
HOUR COUNTER Press the key UP or DW to display the minutes
kWxh Counter It displays the kWxh absorbed by the motor. 0000.0
(only for customized (only for customized version)
version)
Password Random number that changes at each start. If inserted in the 1÷99
key (parameter drv.03), it allows the modification of the
parameters.
7.8.2 Drive
PARAMETER drv.01 Function Field Default

inverter type It is set by the manufacturer and cannot be accessed by the user. t_003 /
The table shows the maximum motor power (4-poles 400V standard ÷
motor) applicable at each GT1000. This parameter is univocally
t_121
associated with the inverter rated current.
drv.01 Motor drv.01 Motor drv.01 Motor drv.01 Motor
t_003 1.5kW t_018 11kW t_045 30kW t_150 110kW
t_004 2.2kW t_022 15kW t_053 37kW t_182 132kW
t_006 4kW t_028 18.5kW t_066 45kW t_216 160kW
t_008 5.5kW t_030 18.5kW t_086 55kW t_258 200kW
t_011 7.5kW t_030 18.5kW t_108 75kW
t_015 9.2kW t_036 22kW t_125 90kW
software release. It allows to define the software release. 00.00
Modification key input. In this parameter it has to be entered the value of Mon.21 to unlock the 0÷99 00000
parameters (see chap. 2.5.1).
Optional interface It selects the language selected for the display of the messages with 0÷5 0
language optional interfaces.
Mains rated voltage. It informs the GT1000 of the mains rated value. 300 ÷ 500 380
REMARK It modifies automatically the threshold of braking switch tripping, the tripping level of the deceleration in voltage
limit, and the undervoltage protection threshold (--UU) .
The braking voltage is: 680Vdc with drv.05≤415
750Vdc with drv.05>415
800Vdc with drv.05=500
selection of the carrier. It sets the modulation frequency of the IGBT bridge. 1÷4 1
1=3kHz,
2=6kHz,
3=9kHz,
4=12kHz.
REMARK With a carrier greater than 3kHz, a current derating is required
(see table 2.2 of the electric data in chapter 2)
control algorithm. it selects the control algorithm. 1÷3 1
1 V/F general purpose

2 Vectorial: FOC
3 Sensorless (not available with the basic control: GT1000)
Undervoltage protection It sets the undervoltage protection threshold (--UU) according to the mains 15÷25% 15
tolerance. voltage set in drv.05.
7.8.3 Parameters of motor-inverter coupling

The following parameters (Mot.01÷Mot.07, in detail) are very important since they determine the good operation of the motor-inverter
assembly: they have to be obtained from the motor rating data or have to be required from the manufacturer of the same and, with vectorial
control (FOC), all of them need to be set.
With V/F control it is enough to set Mot.01, Mot.07. If even only one of these parameters is modified, then it is necessary to switch off and
restart the GT1000 in order to make the new data set operative.
PARAMETER Mot.01 Function Field Default
In = motor rated current in This is the current absorbed by the motor supplied with rated 0.5 ÷ 250.0 Ampere Function of drv. 01
Ampere. voltage and frequency with rated load
Ino = idle current in Ampere This is the current absorbed by the motor in idle mode, at 0.3 ÷ 120.0 A Function of drv. 01
rated voltage and frequency. It differs of some % from the
magnetizing current.
REMARK Usually this data element is not present on the motor rating plate. A quite correct value can be measured in
Mon.04 by letting run, with V/F control (drv.07=1), the motor in idle mode, at rated voltage and frequency.
(FOC) fn = rated This is the rated motor supply frequency 10.0 ÷ 200.0Hz 50.0Hz
frequency in Hz
(FOC) RPMn = rated These are the revolutions reached by the motor with rated 100 ÷ 6000 RPM Function of drv.01
revolutions for minute current and voltage with rated load motor 4 poles
REMARK Avoid to set synchronous revolutions equal to: 120x(Mot.03/number of poles).
(FOC) Vn = rated voltage in This is the rated voltage of the motor. 150 ÷ 500 V 380 V
root-mean-square value
(FOC) kWn This is the power supplied by the motor at its axis. It is a 0.3 ÷ 500.0 kW Function of drv.01
data element supplied by the motor manufacturer.
Remembered that:
60 ⋅ 1000 ⋅ kWn
Mn = = Rated torque [Nm]
2π RPMn
cos ϕ This is the cosϕ of the motor with rated voltage, frequency 0.50 ÷ 0.95 0.8
and load. (data supplied by the motor manufacturer).
(FOC) yield. This is the motor yield at the working rated point. 0.98 ÷ 0.62 Function of drv. 01
(FOC) stator resistance. The parameter represents the stator resistance (in mΩ). 0 ÷ 5000 mΩ 0
PARAMETERS Mot.10-18 Not used Field Default
higher speed limit /positive It limits the maximum reference of positive speed. From 0 to +6000RPM +1500 RPM (4 poles
frequency higher limit / 0,1 to 480.0 Hz motor, 50 Hz) / 50Hz
lower speed limit / negative It limits the maximum reference of negative speed. from -6000 to 0 RPM -1500 RPM (4 poles
frequency lower limit / 480.0 to 0.1 Hz motor, 50 Hz) /-50Hz
number of motor poles. It is used for the display in revolutions. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 4
16, 18, 20
At start there is an active software control on the previously set data. Should the input set of parameters be not "complying" or
should it be non-compatible with the inverter itself, the display shows the message "ErFn". In this status, the commands of
Enabling and of RUN are ignored, the inverter keeps waiting (stand-by). The access to the parameters is allowed in order to
NOTE correct the wrong settings. Once the set of values has been modified and corrected, the inverter has to be switched off; at its
restart, if the parameterization of the inverter is compatible, the message " rdy" is shown on the display.
When one modifies the parameters Mot.01 ÷ Mot.07 and drv.01, drv.05, drv.06 drv.07 and drv.08 to make them become
operative, if you want to avoid to switch off and restart the inverter, proceed as follows:
1) make sure that the inverter is in ready status: “rdy”, not in RUN;
NOTE 2) set rLo.01 = 1;
3) press the key (DOWN) for at least one second.
The inverter perform a reset sequence. The same action can be obtained, always in “rdy” status, by means of the
prolonged simultaneous pressure of the keys SHIFT and RESET.
7.8.4 References
LOCAL operation mode
The switching to the LOCAL operation mode, bypasses the normal selections of the speed reference. The reference is set directly using the
keys UP and DOWN of the keypad. The pressure of one of these keys causes the increase or decrease of the LOCAL reference and the
temporary blinking of the display a momentary switching to the display of the reference that one is currently modifying.
After a second from the end of pressure of these keys, the display mode returns stable on the previously selected quantity.
This automatic bypass can be disabled by setting on 1 the parameter rLo.17.
In this mode, it is possible to use the keypad only to give commands of run/stop keeping the reference selected in a traditional way, from
terminals, as in the REMOTE mode.
REMOTE operation mode
The references of frequency (for V/F) and of speed for the vectorial CF1 CF2 CF3 Reference
control (FOC) are selected by means of the commands (bit of status) CF1, OFF OFF OFF Mux1
CF2, CF3 (see figure C5 of Appendix C). ON OFF OFF Mux2
The status bits CF1, CF2 are linked by default to the terminals 7, 8 by OFF ON OFF Dig3: rEF.09
setting respectively din.03=0, din.04=1. ON ON OFF Dig4: rEF.10
Therefore, the selection of the references occurs according to the
OFF OFF ON Dig5: rEF.11
following table:
ON OFF ON Dig6: rEF.12
The references Mux1 and Mux2 are established respectively by the
selectors rEF.05 and rEF.06. OFF ON ON Dig7: rEF.13
ON ON ON Dig8: rEF.14
PARAMETER rEF.01 Function Field Default
RPM/Hz with maximum it determines the full-scale of the speed reference -6000 ÷ +6000 RPM / +1500 RPM (50Hz 4
reference analog 1 (10V). from analog 1. 0.1 ÷ +480.0 Hz. poles motor) / 50.0 Hz
RPM/Hz with min. reference it determines the scale start of the speed reference -6000 ÷ +6000 RPM / -1500 RPM (50Hz 4
analog 1 (-10V/0V). from analog 1. 0.1 ÷ +480.0 Hz. poles motor) / 0.1 Hz
With the standard V/F operation, the minimum value of the analog reference is meant to be as 0V: the
REMARK
resolution is double.
RPM with maximum it determines the full-scale of the speed reference -6000 ÷ +6000 RPM / +1500 RPM (50Hz 4
reference analog 2 (10V). from analog 2. 0.1 ÷ +480.0 Hz. poles motor) / 50.0 Hz
PARAMETER rEF.04: Function Field Default
RPM with min. reference it determines the scale start of the speed reference -6000 ÷ +6000 RPM / -1500 RPM (50Hz 4
analog 2 (-10V/0V). from analog 1. 0.1 ÷ +480.0 Hz. poles motor) / 0.1 Hz
With the standard V/F operation, the minimum value of the analog reference is meant to be as 0V: the
REMARK
resolution is double.
It is possible to obtain an inverse relation among references from analog (Ref) and output frequency (f) by
setting rEF.02/rEF.04 on a value higher than rEF.03/rEF.01 respectively, as shown in figure.
REMARK
rEF.02 rEF.01 rEF.04 rEF.03
Figure 7.6 Ref. an.1 Ref. an.2

First speed reference it determines the speed reference Mux1 (see block 1-8 1
selector diagram Appendix C).
Second speed reference it determines the speed reference Mux2 (see block 1-8 3
selector diagram Appendix C).
1 REFERENCE FROM ANALOG 1: RIF1 5 Reference with FW/RV automatic (***)
2 Reference from analog 2: RIF2 6 Reference from serial
3 Reference digit 1: rEF.07 7 Reference in freq. or from encoder
4 Reference digit 2: rEF.08 8 Reference from motor potentiometer
(***) MANAGEMENT OF THE ROTATION DIRECTION ACCORDING TO THE POLARITY OF THE REFERENCE.
REMARK This selection is enabled only for the V/F control and with reference in voltage applied to terminals 14-15 (with FOC control the
reference of zero speed is necessary, see Appendix C Fig C.5).
Therefore, when one selects, rEF.05 or rEF.06 on 5, the command logics operate as follows:
1) The terminal 6 has no more any influence.
2) If the terminal 5 is open, the STOP is performed.
3) If the terminal 5 is closed, the RUN is subject to the value and to the sign of the voltage applied to the terminals 14-15.
If the voltage is, in absolute value, lower than 200mV the STOP is performed; while, if it is positive and exceeds 200mV, there is
the RUN in clockwise direction. Should it instead be negative and exceed 200mV there is the RUN in counterclockwise
direction. If rEF.05 or rEF.06 are on value 5, but the selection by the digital inputs enables a different speed reference, the RUN
(FW, RV, STOP) returns to be the traditional one: 5 closed=forwards (FW), 6 closed=backwards (RV), both either closed or
open=STOP.
speed reference digital 1. it sets un speed reference for the inverter; from -6000 a +6000 RPM 0 RPM / 0.1Hz
0.1 a +480.0 Hz..
0.1 a +480.0 Hz..
speed reference digital 3 it sets un speed reference for the inverter; from -6000 a +6000 RPM 0 RPM / 0.1Hz
0.1 a +480.0 Hz..
0.1 a +480.0 Hz..
speed reference digital 5 it sets a speed reference for the inverter; from -6000 to +6000 RPM 0 RPM / 0.1Hz
0.1 to +480.0 Hz..
0.1 to +480.0 Hz..
speed reference digital 7. it sets a speed reference for the inverter; from -6000 to +6000 RPM 0 RPM / 0.1Hz
0.1 to +480.0 Hz..
0.1 to +480.0 Hz..
Sum on speed reference it determines the reference that has to be summed to 1÷4 1
selector. the main current speed reference. (see block diagrams
App. C fig. C-5)
1 Reference from Mux1 3 Reference from serial
2 Reference from Mux2 4 Reference from function PID
Relevance of the speed it sets a speed reference 0÷ ± 200% 0%
reference correction.
 Vanalog . 
Mon .08 = Ref . + Sum term⋅ rEF .16 ⋅  
 10 
NOTE The relevance of the term in the sum can be corrected (in addition or in subtraction) by means of an external analog
signal (Vanalog.) introduced to terminal 14-15 (Ain.13=6), or 16-17 (Ain.14=6). The correction can be observed in
NOTE Mon.08, parameter in which the actual setting remains available. With a voltage of 0Vdc there is a null correction. With
+10Vdc there is the maximum correction in addition. With -10Vdc there is the maximum correction in subtraction. The
function is disabled with rEF.16 = 0%: with negative rEF.16, the function is inverted.
Example: by programming rEF.15=1 and Ain.13=6, the correction in % is performed on the same main speed
reference: in this case, Mux1.
First tripping threshold. it determines the threshold of frequency/ 0.1 ÷ 480.0 Hz 0.1 Hz / 0 RPM.
speed due to the energizing of the internal bit R1. -6000 ÷ 6000 RPM.
REMARK When the speed/output frequency reaches or exceeds the value set by rEF.17, the internal bit R1 reaches 1

Second tripping it determines the threshold of frequency / speed for the energizing 0.1 ÷ 480.0 Hz 0.1 Hz / 0 RPM.
threshold. of the internal bit R2. -6000 ÷ 6000 RPM.
REMARK When the speed/output frequency reaches or exceeds the value set by rEF.18, the internal bit R2 reaches 1
Zero Band. it determines the field in which the inverter is considered at zero 5 ÷ 50 RPM 50 RPM
speed/frequency. 0.1 ÷ 5.0 Hz. 0.5 Hz
REMARK the internal bit R3 zero speed, i.e. minimum speed, energizes, if the speed, in module, is lower than the
parameter rEF.19.
Speed band reached it determines the field of acknowledgement of reached 5 ÷ 50 RPM 50 RPM
speed./frequency. 0.1 ÷ 5.0 Hz. 0.5 Hz
REMARK the internal bit R4 speed reached energizes, if the motor speed/frequency corresponds to the one of the
reference in the band +/- rEF.20.
7.8.5 Ramps
Speed/frequency
Ta Td
t [s]
Ta Td
Ta = rPS.01÷08
Td = rPS.09÷16
Figure 7.7
PARAMETER rPS.01 Function Field Default
acceleration coefficient 1. it sets the time the speed / frequency reference takes to go from 0 to 1800 0.1÷2000.0s 10.0s
RPM (FOC) or from 0 to 60Hz (V/F).
PARAMETER rPS.02÷rPS.08 Function Field Default
acceleration coefficient 2 ÷ 8. As for parameter rPS.01. 0.1÷2000.0s 10.0s
deceleration coefficient 1. it sets the time the speed / frequency reference takes to go from 1800 to 0 0.1÷2000.0s 10.0s
RPM (FOC) / from 60 to 0Hz (V/F).
PARAMETER rPS.10÷rPS.16 Function Field Default
deceleration coefficient 2 ÷ 8. As for parameter rPS.09 0.1÷2000.0s 10.0s
In the operation with impressed voltage (V/F), it is possible to obtain a maximum ramp time of 16000s at 480Hz equal to
REMARK 1666s at 50Hz.
In the vectorial operation mode (FOC), it is possible to obtain a maximum ramp time of ramp of 6666s at 6000RPM equal
to 1666s at 1500RPM.
BIT ACTIVE
The selection of the active ramps is determined by the status of the RP1 RP2 RP3 RAMPS
logic bits RP1, RP2 and RP3 according to the following table: OFF OFF OFF rPS.01/rPS.09
The logic bits RP1, RP2 and RP3 must be linked to the parameters ON OFF OFF rPS.02/rPS.10
din.01÷din.05 to the wished inputs or commands (chap. 3.2.14).
OFF ON OFF rPS.03/rPS.11
By default, the logic bits RP1 and RP2 are associated respectively
to digital status RIFIN1 and RIFIN 2 (bit 2 and 3 of the command- ON ON OFF rPS.04/rPS.12
word serial). OFF OFF ON rPS.05/rPS.13
ON OFF ON rPS.06/rPS.14
OFF ON ON rPS.07/rPS.15
ON ON ON rPS.08/rPS.16
rounding coefficient it sets the connection time between speed constant and ramp. 0÷200 0
for S-shape ramps. available only as customized option.
7.8.6 Volts on Hertz (V/F)

PARAMETER Vvf.01 Function Field Default
voltage gain. it sets the value % of voltage corresponding to the rated frequency. 50 ÷ 100% 100%
REMARK See also the parameters Vvf.04 and 05 to optimize the V/F characteristic.
Basic frequency (of full This is the frequency at which the voltage on the motor reaches the rated 30.0÷480.0Hz 50.0 Hz
voltage) (Fb) value.
voltage compensation. It sets in % the voltage compensation corresponding to the rated voltage. 30 ÷ 100%. 100 %
30%=excluded
REMARK  Vvf .01  drv .05 ⋅ 1.41
Coefficient =  ⋅
 100   VCOND 
Voltage level in the point at Point A of the V/F characteristic. (see remark Vvf.05). 10.0÷50.0 % 33.3 %
1/3 Fb
Voltage level in the point at Point B of the V/F characteristic. 20.0÷90.0 % 66.6 %
2/3 Fb
REMARK The actual value of voltage in the 2 points A and B depends on the voltage gain set in Vvf.01.
The percentage of the points A and B of the V/F characteristic is calculated on Vvf.01. The drawing in figure 3.2.6-1
REMARK highlights two important details:
1) the "shape" of the characteristic is connected exclusively to the two parameters Vvf.04 and Vvf.05
2) the amplitude depends on the voltage gain selected in Vvf.01. The contribution to low frequencies deriving from the
manual Boost, set by Vvf.06, is summed to the characteristic of the frequency section where it is active.
V V
Vout=100%
Vvf.01=100
Vout=80%
Vvf.01=80
B
Vvf.05=66.6
B
Vvf.05=66.6
A
Vvf.04=33.3 A
Vvf.04=33.3
f f
1/3Fb 2/3Fb Fb 1/3Fb 2/3Fb Fb
V V
Vout=100%
Vvf.01=100
Vout=80%
Vvf.01=80
B
Vvf.05=50.0 B
Vvf.05=50.0
Vvf.04=20.0
A A
Vvf.04=20.0
f f
1/3Fb 2/3Fb Fb 1/3Fb 2/3Fb Fb
Figure 7.8
Manual level of voltage It sets the voltage increase level at low frequencies (see Fig. 7.9). 0÷20.0 % 0
BOOST.
Automatic level of voltage It sets the voltage increase level at low frequencies depending on the 0÷100.0 % 0 (0%=excluded)
BOOST. active current (it depends also on Mot.09: stator resistance).
V (%)
20.0
15.0
Vvf.06
10.0
Figure 7.9
5.0
f
Fb Fb
16 2
BRAKING IN D.C. (V/F CONTROL)

With this function, it is possible to obtain a phase of the rotor blocked
after a stop command, in moment in which the output frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

reaches the threshold VvF.08. In this case, the frequency is
immediately brought to zero and starts a continuous voltage injection
phase on the motor with amplitude and duration adjustable
respectively by means of VvF.09 and VvF.10. If during this interval, a Braking start Vvf.08
run command returns, the timing is interrupted and run starts again a
normal ramp.
It is possible to influence the function by adding a consent from
external contact (it can be one of the 5 commands or 3 configurable t [s]
digital inputs: whose corresponding parameter din.01÷din.05 has to
DC braking
Vvf.09
be set on 12). In this case, the braking up to stop occurs only if the
voltage
enabling contact is activated. If no input is configured on 12, the DC
braking occurs at each stop. The function is excluded with VvF.10=0.
DC Braking time Vvf.10 t [s]

“DC braking” trip it sets the frequency after which in decrease ramp it is injected a continuous 0.0÷20.0Hz 0.0 Hz
lock voltage on the motor.
“DC braking” level it sets the value % of the DC voltage kept at output during the phase of rotor 0 ÷20.0% 0. Hz
(intensity). blocked by the stop.
REMARK during this phase the manual BOOST eventually set in Vvf.06 does not activate. This function is not launched
during a speed inversion. It can be interrupted by a new run or by a Drive Disable command (terminal 20 open).
“DC braking” time it sets the time during which, at stop, once Vvf.08 has been reached, it is kept 0 ÷ 20.0 s 0
(duration). injected the continuous lock voltage on the motor. 0=disabled function
F-MIN. it sets the value of the minimum frequency (in module) that can be supplied to 0.1 ÷ 5.0Hz. 0.5 Hz.
the inverter
Start waiting time. during the starting phase and during the inversions, it introduces an interval 0.0 ÷ 10.0 s 0.0
during which the motor is controlled at the frequency set in Vvf.11 (F-MIN)
with a voltage equal to the one resulting from the V/F characteristic selection
and from the manual BOOST setting.
REMARK this phase can be interrupted only from by a Drive Disable command (opening of terminal 10 )
The figure shows a simple operation sequence. Inverter
output
The duration of the section "A" can be selected by frequency
Vvf.12, that of section "D" by means of Vvf.10. Fmin B C D
It shall be observed that after the phase "D" the motor is t
no more controlled and is free to rotate . A B C A
RUN INVERSION STOP
CRITICAL FREQUENCY/SPEED AVOIDANCE

There can be output frequencies that bring the motor at rotation speed causing mechanical resonance problems harmful for the motor and the
system. By setting this parameter at a certain frequency, for ex. 40.0 Hz, one avoids the operation at this frequency both clockwise and
counterclockwise. The frequency of 40 Hz is not "skipped" in ramp, but is avoided at setting level both from digital reference and from analog
reference. The amplitude of the hysteresis value preset is established by parameter Vvf.13.
The action of hysteresis can be verified in Mon.08 and it is also possible to combine it with Vvf.15 for a greater hysteresis amplitude.
By setting on zero the hysteresis value preset no frequency lock-out will happen.
Frequency hysteresis it defines the amplitude of the frequency interval that cannot be set 0.3 ÷ 5.0 Hz 0.3 Hz
value preset.
frequency 1 crossing It blocks the setting of a given frequency value. Vvf.14 = 0.0 Hz disabled function. 0.÷480.0Hz 0.0 Hz

Frif Fmax
Vvf.13
Skip
2·Vvf.13
frequency Vvf.13
Frequency set input

Figure 7.10
Stop (frequency) time gap 0.1÷5.0 Hz 0.5 Hz
REMARKS
Output frequency
F MAX
1) The parameter Vvf.17 allows to obtain the stop, if the frequency reference (for ex.
from potentiometer) falls under the level set by this parameter. The stop happens
(Hz)
without opening the run terminals. If the reference returns to a value ≥ than Vvf.17
there is of new start.
2) This function is available for all references, both analog and digital.
Vvf.17 3) By setting Vvf.17 = 0.1 Hz this function is excluded.
0 100%
Frequency adjustment signal

Compensation of In the V/F operation, there can be areas of instability output current (IOUT), with 0.0 ÷ 4.0 0.0
proportional frequency at current peaks close to the rated current. With this parameter one acts on the (function
IOUT. frequency set to correct these current oscillations. excluded)
Filter on the IOUT for the It sets the disconnection frequency of the filter on the current IOUT, used for the 0.0 ÷ 75.0 Hz 5.0 Hz
frequency compensation. compensation of the current oscillations (parameter Vvf.18).
Limitation of acceleration Parameter reserved. 0. ÷ 10 4
ramp and power at normal
operation.
REMARK PARAMETERS FOR APPLICATIONS WITH QUADRATIC TORQUE

In the applications with quadratic torque (pumps, fans, …) the parameters determining the V/F characteristic (Vvf.04,
Vvf.05) can be modified to obtain an energy saving.
According to the torque characteristic of the load, it is possible to reduce the voltage on the motor under the rated
frequency. In this case, the V/F characteristic is no more linear up to the basic frequency Fb (parameter Vvf.02).
V[%]
Vvf.01=100% Vout=100%
B
Vvf.05=54.0%
A
Vvf.04=19.0%
F [Hz]
1/3Vvf.02 2/3Vvf.02 Vvf.02=Fb
The following table gives the values to be set for Vvf.04 and Vvf.05 to obtain some common developments of V/F.
V=k · f V=k · f1.5 V=k · f1.7 V=k · f2
Vvf.04 33.3 19.0 15.0 12.0
Vvf.05 66.6 54.0 50.0 44.0
7.8.7 Speed regulation
PARAMETER rEv.01 Function Field Default

1stcoefficient of proportional it sets the value of the proportional gain in the speed regulation stage 0 ÷ 8000 2000
gain.
REMARK A high coefficient determines a rapid response top the load transistors.
An excessive gain can cause oscillations in the response.
1st coefficient of integral gain. it sets the value of the integral gain in the speed regulation stage 0 ÷ 650 50
REMARK the integral term of the speed regulation stage compensates eventual oscillations during normal
operation due to the proportional gain. A too high value can in any case cause instability in the
response.
1st coefficient of derivative gain. it sets the value of derivative gain in the speed regulation stage. 0 ÷ 650 0
REMARK The derivative term can be used to improve the stability of the regulation, if the regulation with the
integral and proportional parameters is not enough. A too high value causes usually instability.
first set / second set internal it determines the speed threshold for the energizing of a logic bit. With the 100 ÷ 6000 6000 RPM
relay range. logic bit on 1, the second gains of the speed regulator are enabled. RPM. (6000 =
disabled
function)
REMARK It is possible to force the logic bit also using a previously configured digital input (din.01÷din05=14): in this
case, the threshold rEv.04 becomes meaningless.
2nd coefficient of proportional it sets the value of the proportional gain in the speed regulation stage. 0 ÷ 8000 2000
gain. See remark rEv.01.
2nd coefficient of integral gain. it sets the value of integral gain in the speed regulation stage. 0 ÷ 650 50
See remark rEv.02.
2nd coefficient of derivative it sets the value of derivative gain in the speed regulation stage. 0 ÷ 650 0
gain. See remark rEv.03.
PARAMETER rEv.08 (V/F): Function Field Default
sliding compensation. It increases (with sign) the set frequency of a term proportional to the active 0.0 ÷ 10.0% 0.0
supplied current.
For ex.: with rEv.08 = 10 there is an increase equal to 0.1Fb (Vvf.02) when
the active supplied current is 105%.
REMARK This contribution is not visible in Mon.08. It can be noticed in Mon.07 at finished ramp
M Coppia
Load torque
F (Hz)
REMARK For the compliance (parameters rEv.09, rEv.10, rEv.11) see dedicated paragraph (7.9.27).
7.8.8 Torque regulation
PARAMETER rEc.01: Function Field Default

Maximum positive torque. it determines the maximum positive torque that can be supplied to the +10÷+180% +150%.
inverter. of the motor rated
torque.
REMARK The limits of torque active for the 2 types of control are given here below:
drv.07=1 drv.07=2
(V/F) (FOC)
Value  rEc.01   rEc.01 
  ⋅ I nMot ⋅ cos ϕ Mot   ⋅ C Mot
 100   100 
Maximum limit 180% 150%
InMot= Mot.01
cosϕMot = Mot.07
CMot = motor rated torque connected
Limitation of positive torque from external signal.
REMARK
The function activates by setting Ain.13=3 and allows to regulate the maximum positive torque, set by
rEc.01, varying the voltage applied to the terminal 14-15 according to the following formula.
V  [with minimum base of 1%]
Lim. resulting torque = rEc.01 ⋅  14−15 
 10 
Applied voltage (V14-15) Limit of resulting positive torque
Example: 10V 150%
with rEc.01=150%, varying the applied voltage, one 8V 120%
obtains the limit torque in table. 6V 90%
5V 75%
3V 45%
0V remains 1%
REMARK If the terminal 14 is not used, it is possible, with JP2=ON, to connect it at +10V: in order that the limit
remains corresponding to rEc.01 (connect the terminal 15 at 0V).
Maximum negative torque. it determines the maximum negative torque that can be supplied to the -150÷-10% of the -150%.
inverter. motor rated torque
REMARK The torque limits active for the 2 types of control are given here below
drv.07=1 drv.07=2
(V/F) (FOC)
Value  rEc.02   rEc.02 
  ⋅ I nMot ⋅ cos ϕ Mot   ⋅ C Mot
 100   100 
Maximum limit -150% -150%
InMot= Mot.01
cosϕMot = Mot.07
CMot = motor rated torque connected
Limitation of negative torque from external signal.

The function activates by setting Ain.14=3 and allows to regulate the maximum negative torque, set by rEc.02, varying the voltage applied to
terminal 16 according to the following formula.
V 
REMARK Lim . resulting torque = rEc .02 ⋅  16  [with minimum base of 1%]
 10 
Limits of required torque

150%
100%
rEc.01
Motor revol.
RPMN (Mot.04) 2 RPMN 3 RPMN (in module)
RPMN (Mot.04) 2 RPMN 3 RPMN
Motor revol.
(in module)
-100%
rEc.02
-150% Limits of required torque
Figure 7.11
rEc.01
+
Mot.20 Mot.19 N
- 0 +
-
rEc.02
Figure 7.12

Level of the motor It sets the threshold of thermal protection tripping. The protection can be 30 ÷ 105 %. 105 %.
thermal protection. disabled with rLo.10 = 1.
REMARK The integration, signaled by the blinking of the display, starts when the current exceeds the set value. The level reached by the
integrator can be read on Mon.05. With rEc.03 equal to 105, the thermal protection trips after 60s, if the output current remains
constantly 1.5 times of the set current. The current threshold is calculated according to the table following:
drv.07=1 (V/F) drv.07=2 (FOC)
 rEc .03   rEc .03 
  ⋅ IN   ⋅ InMot
Value  100   100 
IN = Rated current of the GT1000
InMot= Mot.01
In the V/F operation mode (drv.07=1) I 
calibrate rEc.03 according to the formula: rEc.03 = 105 ⋅  nMot 

 IN 
REMARK In the operation with carrier >3 kHz (for the sizes that foresees it) the capacity of the GT1000 is reduced automatically to
limit the temperature on the IGBT bridge (the losses due to commutation increase with the carrier).
The threshold of integration start is reduced according to the carrier, as follows:
CARRIER 3 kHz 6 kHz 9 kHz 12 kHz
THRESHOLD 105% 92% 84% 75%
Not used /
Not used /
Not used /
Adjustment of torque In the V/F operation mode, it allows to correct the tripping of the 50% ÷ 150% 107 %.
limits (Icosϕ). torque limitations.
selector of torque it determines the torque reference (see block diagram fig.4-8). 1÷6 1
reference source.
1 Reference from PID speed
2 Reference from serial
3 Reference from analog 1 (RIF1)
5 Internal reference
6 Reference from technological function
REMARK
The values 2÷6 make active the torque operation mode.
rEc.08 = 1: Normal operation in speed regulation: the torque reference is given by the speed error processing. This value
depends on the load conditions and is such as to keep the speed of the motor equal to the required speed
reference, unless they do not exceed the torque limits.
rEc.08 ≠ 1: The torque reference is given independently from the speed ring: the inverter tries to reach and keep a torque equal
to this reference. The speed ring is not excluded, but intervenes only if the motor tries to exceed the limits of speed
given by Mot.19, Mot.20.
rEc.08=3,4. The signal of torque reference comes from the analog 1-2; the signal +/-10V, is converted in value a +rEc.01/-
rEc.02. The filter, and the offset on this signal remain active (see calibration of the analog outputs).
rEc.08=5 the torque reference, that is given by the parameter rEc.11 (internal torque), can be varied with continuity, with a
signal 0÷10V on the analog outputs 1-2 (see the description of parameter rEc.11).

Selection of the torque limit it determines the torque limit limitation mode (fig.7.13). (in progress) 1, 5 1
limitation mode.
1 Standard
2 rEc.01 constant power
3 rEc.02 constant power
4 rEc.01 e rEc.02 constant power
5 /
Selector of torque additional term it determines the additional torque reference (block diagram fig.4.8). 1 , 5 (6) 1
source. (in progress)
1 Additional term null
2 Reference from serial
5 Internal reference (rEc.11)
6 (Reference from technological function)
Torque request positive limits
rEc.01 Max
rEc.01 100% Standard

es = 90%
Constant Power
63%
rEc.01
es.= 63%
Motor revol.
RPMN 2 RPMN 3 RPMN 4 RPMN (in module)
(Mot.04)
rEc.02
es.= -63% Constant Power
63%
rEc.02
es.= 90% -100% Standard
rEc.02 min
Torque request negative limits

internal torque reference. it sets an internal torque reference in the operation in torque. It is -150 ÷ 150% 1
enabled, if rEc.08 = 5.
REMARK the value set by rEc.11 can be modified by applying a variable voltage from 0 to 10V (see parameters Ain.13, Ain.14) to the analog
output 1 (terminals 14-15) or 2 (terminals 16). The effect of these inputs on the parameter rEc.11 is shown in figure.
M
rEc.11
1%
0 Anal.1 / Anal.2
10 V
7.8.9 Internal regulators
PARAMETER rEL.01 Function Field Default

Correction of current loop First correction of the gain of the current regulators U/V/W. The calibration -100 ÷ 100% 0%
gain of this parameter can be necessary for mains voltages greater than that of
the motor or when the motor has a relatively low inductance.
Protected parameter, for the modification see chap. 7.10.
Correction of flow ring int. First correction of the integral gain of the flow current regulator. For 6-poles -10 ÷ 10 0
gain (ID) motors it is suggested to set the value –5.
The internal gain becomes: KI_ID=10+rEL.02
Correction of flow ring prop. First correction of the proportional gain of the flow current regulator. 0 ÷ 20 0
gain (ID) Protected parameter, for the modification see chap. 7.10.
Correction of torque ring int. First correction of the integral gain of the torque current regulator. For 6- -20 ÷ 20 0
gain (IQ) poles motors it is suggested to set the value –10. The internal gain
becomes: KI_IQ=20+rEL.04 (it must not become zero!)
Correction of torque ring First correction of the proportional gain of the torque current regulator. -20 ÷ 20 0
prop. gain (IQ) Protected parameter, for the modification see chap. 7.10.
flow feed forward gain recalibration of the voltage feed forward for the flow current. 0 ÷ 100 0
torque feed forward gain recalibration of the voltage feed forward for the torque current. 0 ÷ 100 0
Adjustment of the rotor time recalibration of the rotor time constant. 0 ÷ 100 0
constant TTR
compensation fine It recalibrates the dead times compensation calibration. -27 ÷ 27 0
calibration - ‘dead times’’ Protected parameter, for the modification see chap. 7.10
REMARK Operating in V/F, it can be necessary to act on the parameter rEL.10 which finely modifies the compensation of
the dead times. This can be achieved as follows:
1) A significantly sinusoidal current at low frequencies.
2) Absence of torque oscillations with motor in idle operation.
The sinusoidal feature of the current at low frequencies is an index of correct calibration.
It is remarked, in any case, that a correct compensation of the dead times is not an assurance of complete
absence of oscillations in the whole operation field of the motor. In this case, it is necessary to use the
parameters VvF.18 and VvF.19
7.8.10 Various internal enabling commands
The logic functions rLo.xx are parameters that can have only the values 0 or 1.
PARAMETER rLo.01 Function Field Default
Unlock parameter for rLo.06 set on 1, it makes modifiable the function rLo.06 and allows to recover the 0
parameters set by the manufacturer. At start it is automatically brought to zero.
It disables the access key. set on 1, it enables the lock key of the parameters. 0
(see chapter 7.4.1)
PARAMETER rLo.03 rLo.04, Function Field Default
rLo.05 (FOC)
see remarks concerning the protected parameters chap. 7.10 0
restoration of the default It allows to bring all parameters back to the related default values. Curr
values.
REMARK After having set the value 1 in the parameter rLo.01, set (with the key DW) rLo.06 on " dEF". If at this point
the inverter is switched off, at next restart all default values are recovered.
In this case, it is suggested to verify and eventually correct the 7 parameters Mot.01÷Mot.07, then
enable them with a second switching-off/restart operation of the inverter before giving run
commands.
PARAMETER rLo.07 (FOC) Function Field Default
disabling of the running allows the exclusion of the function of flight restart in vectorial control (FO). 0
motor reset with vectorial
regulation.
REMARK if the function is excluded (rLo.07=0), the inverter starts to modulate beginning always from frequency zero: if the
motor is coasting, there may be the tripping of the overcurrent protection ("--OC") due to a difference between
the frequency controlled by the inverter and the one corresponding to the revolutions of free rotation of the
motor.
disabling of the mains set on 1, it excludes the reading and disables the mains sensor. 0 (enabled)
sensor (OFF).
REMARK It is a protected parameter. For its modification see App.D of this manual. Set rLo.08 = 1 with GT1000 supplied
in DC BUS. The setting is usually performed by the manufacturer. In case of restoration of the default values,
the parameter must be reset on 1 by the operator.
disabling of the mains set on 0, it excludes the tripping of the mains overvoltage protection (--OUS). 1 enabled)
overvoltage protection (--
OUS).
PARAMETER rLo.10: Function Field Default
Disabling of the motor set on 1, it excludes the thermal protection of the motor. 0 (enabled)
thermal protection.
REMARK When the output current exceeds of 5% the rated output current of the motor (Mot.01 FO) or of the inverter
(V/F), the display starts to blink (overload) and the accumulator register Mon.05 increases its content. If one
reaches the value 100 with rLo.10=0, the thermal protection (--tH) trips.
Exclude the protection only for the performance of tests and special applications: bear in mind that in this case,
REMARK the motor can reach excessive temperatures, if the needed precautions are not taken.
Do not disconnect the protection, if carriers greater than 3 kHz are used.

Type of motor thermal With rLo.11 = 1 the allowed overload is 150% for 1 minute each 10, regardless of 1
protection. the output frequency (servoventilated motor). If the rLo.11 = 0 (self-ventilated
motor), the allowed overload is 150% for 1' each 10' with output frequency higher
than the half of the rated frequency(Fnom/2), and it becomes 30" each 10' with
frequency lower than Fnom/2.
not used
PARAMETER rLo.13 (V/F): Function Field Default
Motor revolutions display With V/F control, when there is the encoder it must be set on 1, displaying in this way 0
the actual revolutions of the motor in Mon.02.
PARAMETER rLo.14 (V/F): Function Field Default
deceleration in voltage limit. When the voltage of the DC BUS exceeds a given level, depending on drv.05, 0
the slope of the barking ramp Is reduced in order to avoid the tripping of the
overvoltage protection (figure here below). By default, the function is active
(1 => disabled function).
VDC
Kx
f [Hz] t [s]
Figure 7.14
t [s]
PARAMETER rLo.15 (FOC): Function Field Default
"Encoder tear”. With function enabled, if the difference between set revolutions (Mon.07) and actual 0
revolutions of the motor exceeds a threshold, for about a second, the protection trips disabled
showing on the display the message “-Enc” and blocking the inverter. The protection
can be reset using the pre-arranged input.
PARAMETER rLo.16 (FOC): Function Field Default
Enabling test encoder”. test encoder 0
disabled
This function has to be used (rLo.16=1) only at commissioning. If the output hertz and the revolutions are not
matched in terms of sign, this protection trips (-Enc).
It cannot be used as “tachometric tear” and must be disconnected at the end of the verification.
Selection of references 0 = disabled function 0
source in local mode 1= in LOCAL operation mode (MAN) it allows to keep active the selection of the usual
references (as from block diagram F5, Appendix C).
Locking of commands in 0 = disabled function 0
local mode 1= it disables the keys MAN, START, STOP and making usable the keypad only for
the reading or the modification of the parameters.
Used together with rLo.02 it blocks completely the function of the keypad (it remains
usable only as display an as push-button for alarm reset).
7.8.11 Configurations of analog outputs
At terminals XM1-18 and XM2-11 (of the expansion board GEDEA1) are available two analog outputs having respectively voltage 0 ÷ + 10V and 0
÷ +/- 10V . One of the quantities in the table can be selected:
Full-scale
V/F FOC
1 Motor revolutions (N) Max (Mot.19/Mot.20)
2 Output frequency (FOUT) Max (Mot.19/Mot.20)
3 Output current (IOUT) 250%ININV (*)
4 Thermal protection counter (Th%) 100%
5 Capacitor voltage (Vc) 1000V
6 Speed ref.: (No) ramp downstream Max (Mot.19/Mot.20)
7 Speed ref. set (N40) at ramp upstream Max (Mot.19/Mot.20)
8 Torque Ref. (Tq0) / 250%CNMOT
9 Torque feedback (Tq) 250%CNMOT 250%CNMOT
10 Power measure (P) 250%PNMOT 250%PNMOT
11 Aux1 see diA.01
12 Aux2 see diA.02
13 Motor potentiometer 100%
14 Set of the PID +/- 2048
15 PID feedback +/- 2048
16 Register calibration ±255 bit
(*) ININV: rated inverter current
PARAMETER Aot.01: Function Field Default
Selector of analog output 1 quantity. it determines the analog output 1: terminal XM1-18 (see table). 1÷16 1
motor revolutions
offset analog output 1 it corrects the offset of the analog output 1. -127÷127 0
gain analog output 1 It allows to vary the gain of the analog output 1 50÷200% 100.0%
Selector of analog output 2 quantity. it determines the analog output 2: terminal XM2-11 (see table). 1÷16 3
output current
offset analog output 2 it corrects the offset of the analog output 2 -127÷127 0
gain analog output 2 It allows to vary the gain of the analog output 2 50÷200% 100.0%
register of PWM calibrations parameter reserved -255÷255 0
configuration analog output 1. It configures the type of electric signal of the analog output 1, -2÷2 2
according to the table given here below (the value 1 has the same
effect of the 2).
PARAMETER Aot.09: Function
configuration analog output 2. It configures the type of electric signal of the analog output 2, according to the table given here
below: default 1
2 Rectified signal 0/+10V
1 Normal signal ±10V
0 Zero output
-1 In normal current ±4÷20mA (*)
-2 In rectified current 4÷20mA (*)
REMARK (*) the output in current requires the use of the optional board SVS2AB.
7.8.12 Configuration of the analog inputs
PARAMETER Ain.01: Function Field Default

offset of analog input 1. it corrects the offset of the input at terminal 14-15. -100÷+100 0
PARAMETER Ain.02 Function Field Default
gain of analog input 1. it corrects the gain of the input at terminal 14-15. 50÷150% 100.0
Digital filter of analog input 1 It filters the input in order to eliminate noises present on the connection line, 0=none 1
(terminals 14-15) the numeric value set defines the time constant of the filter filtering,
1=4ms,
2=8ms,
3=16ms,
4=32ms,
5=64ms,
6=128ms.
PARAMETER Ain.04: Function Field Default
Offset of analog input 2. it corrects the offset of the input at terminal 16. -100÷+100 0
gain of analog input 2. it corrects the gain of the input at terminal 16. 50÷150% 100.0
Digital filter of analog input 2 It filters the input of the reference in order to eliminate noises present on the 0=none 1
(terminal 16) connection line, the numeric value set defines the time constant of the filter filtering,
1=4ms,
2=8ms,
3=16ms,
4=32ms,
5=64ms,
6=128ms.
PARAMETERS Ain.07÷12 not used Field Default

selector of the destination of it determines the use of the analog input 1 according to the table given here 1÷8 1
the analog input 1 below.
(terminals 14-15)
1 RIF1 (reference speed I)
2 Available
3 Limit of positive torque from external signal (rEC.01)
4 Limit of torque from external signal (rEC.01 ÷ rEC.02)
5 Internal reference of torque Ki
6 Correction % of the term in sum from external signal (rEF.16)
7 Management PTC/NTC
8 Correction of ref. speed from exp board 2nd encoder(**)
selector of the destination of it determines the use of the analog input 2 according to the table given here 1÷8 1
analog input 2 (terminal 16) below.
1 RIF2 (reference speed II)
2 Available
3 Limit of negative torque from external signal (rEC.02)
4 Limit of torque from external signal (rEC.01 ÷ rEC.02)
5 Internal reference of torque Ki
6 Correction % of the term in sum from external signal (rEF.16)
7 Management PTC/NTC
8 Correction of ref. speed from exp board 2nd encoder (**)
REMARK If you program both Ain.13=4 and Ain.14=4, it is active only the analog input 1 (terminals 14-15).

configuration V or mA analog Allows to use the analog input 1 with signal in voltage, in current 0-20 1÷3 1
input 1 (terminals 14-15) mA or in current 4-20 mA. The use of the signal in current requires the
closure of the jumper JP9.
1 Input in voltage
2 Input in current (0-20 mA)
3 Input in current (4÷20 mA)
configuration V or mA analog Allows to use the analog input 2 with signal in voltage, in current 0-20 1÷3 1
input 2 (terminal 16) mA or in current 4-20 mA . The use of the signal in current requires the
closure of the jumper JP3.
1 Input in voltage
2 Input in current (0-20 mA)
3 Input in current (4÷20 mA)
Enabling of protection loss The protection, if enabled, trips when the signal falls under 3mA. 0-1 0 (disabled)
4÷20 mA
Threshold of overtemperature It determines the value of the tripping of the overtemperature alarm 0.00÷10.00 V 5.00 V
alarm (chap. 7.8.29) when it is foreseen on the motor a PTC/NTC.
Threshold of overtemperature It determines the value of the tripping of the overtemperature protection, 0.00÷10.00 V 7.50 V
protection (chap. 7.8.29) when it is foreseen on the motor a PTC/NTC.
7.8.13 Configurations of digital outputs
At terminals 3/4 of the control board and 7/8 and 9/10 of the 0 output not used
expansion board (GEDEA1) are available three relay digital 1 internal bit R1: speed threshold (rEF.17)
outputs that can be respectively configured using the 2 internal bit R2: speed threshold (rEF.18)
parameters dot.01÷dot.03 according to the following table.
3 internal bit R3: zero speed (rEF.19)
4 internal bit R4: speed reached (rEF.20)
5 internal bit R5: PID output threshold (Fn6.09)
6 internal bit R6: alarm PTC/NTC (Ain.18/Ain.19)
7 internal bit R7: threshold corr.active/torque (Fn7.08)
8 internal bit R8: current output threshold (Fn7.13)
9 internal bit R9: command 1st auxiliary pump
10 internal bit R10: command 2nd auxiliary pump
11 internal bit R11: 4/20mA loss
12 internal bit R12: “DRIVE OK” relay
13 internal bit R13: RUN acquired
PARAMETER dot.01 Function Field Default
Selector of command of relay it determines the command of the relay RL2. 0÷13 3
2 (terminals 3-4).
Selector of command of relay it determines the command of the relay RL3 (expansion board). 0÷13 1
3 (terminals 7-8 exp. board)
Selector of command of relay it determines the command of the relay RL4 (expansion board). 0÷13 2
4 (terminals 9-10 exp. board)
inversion of relay output 2. It inverts the function of the output 0÷1 0
7.8.14 Configuration of digital inputs
The command bits 2-3 RIFIN1, RIFIN2 and the digital inputs 0 Function CF1 (it selects references)
corresponding to the terminals 7-8-9, called respectively COM1, 1 Function CF2 (it selects references)
COM2, COM3, are programmable with regards to their functions 2 Function CF3 (it selects references)
respectively by means of the parameters din.01÷din.05. Their 3 Function RP1 (it selects ramps)
configuration respects the following table:
4 Function RP2 (it selects ramps)
5 Function RP3 (it selects ramps)
6 UP-Motor potentiometer
7 DOWN-Motor potentiometer
8 NC EXTERNAL ALARM
9 NO EXTERNAL ALARM
10 It enables the compliance
11 It enables the P.I.D. (V/F)
12 It enables the DC braking (V/F)
13 It activates the % reduction motor voltage (V/F)
14 It activates the 2nd set of speed regulator gains (FOC)
15 Emergency Management with Profibus network
16 Alarm reset
17÷30 Available
(31) Input disabled
PARAMETER din.01 Function Field Default
Configuration RIFIN1 * (bit2 it determines the function of the bit 2 of the command-word. 0÷16 (31) 31
command word)
Configuration RIFIN2 * (bit3 it determines the function of the bit 3 of the command-word. 0÷16 (31) 31
command word)
Configuration digital input COM1 it determines the function of the digital input at terminal 7. 0÷16 (31) 0
(terminal 7).
(terminal 8).
(terminal 9). (RESET)
(*) RIFIN1 and RIFIN2 are bits available only at level of word commands (serial), i.e. they do not have an associated physical input in the terminal
board.
7.8.15 Parameters of serial configuration
PARAMETER S-L.01 Function Field Default

Selection of network type or it determines the selection of the of network type or of serial connection. See the 1÷4 1
of serial connection. chapter concerning the serial connection in par. 8.4 .
1 ANSI X3.28-2.5-A4
2 (reserved)
3 PROFIBUS
4 PROFIBUS + ANSI 232
Enabling of the serial It enables (S-L.02 = 0) or disables (S-L.02 = 1) the communication 1 (disabled)
communication.
REMARK After having modified the value, it is necessary to switch off and restart the inverter.
Activation of the With S-L.03 = 0 the hardware commands combine themselves in OR with 0
commands from serial. the ones from serial line, exception made for the DRIVE ENABLE
command that becomes on AND. With S-L.03 = 1, the active commands
remain only the hardware ones (the DREN command from serial line is not
necessary).
REMARK Variations of S-L.03 do no require the switching-off and the restart of the inverter.
Reserved 0
do not change!
Selection RS485HD/RS232 S-L.05=1: it is active on the terminal board the operation RS485HD (Half- 1
Duplex) S-L.05=0: it is active the serial RS232 on the telephone connector
X3.
Reserved 0
BCC (x ANSI) It determines whether to calculate or not the checksum of the data lock. 1 (disabled)
See chapter concerning the serial connection (chapter 8)
Parity It determines the transmission or not of the parity bit. 0 (enabled)
see chapter related to the serial (chapter 8)
BAUD RATE It sets the baud rate of the serial transmission. The numeric values set 600 ÷ 9600 9600 Baud
defines the speed of the transmission (if necessary): 600Bd, 1200Bd,
2400Bd, 4800Bd, 9600Bd.
Station address It sets the address of the station in the serial transmission. 0 ÷ 32 1
PPO It sets the type of PPO in PROFIBUS transmission. See chapter related to 1÷5 2
the serial transmission (see Profibus application remark)
Selection display Mon.16 It determines the meaning of Mon.16. With S-L.15= 0 there is the pure 0÷1 0
hardware status of the commands, on 1 there is, instead, their combination
with the ones coming from serial.
Modification of the Having configured a terminal (din.xx=15) to manage the Profibus 0÷1 0
commands in Profibus emergency, the enabling of the terminal with S-16=1 allows to give the
emergency commands in OR without need of the DRIVE ENABLE command from
serial line (see Profibus application remark).
7.8.16 Serial OUT (Profibus)
The logic functions Sod.xx are parameters that Sod.01 Motor revolutions (N)
can acquire only the values 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON): Sod.02 Output frequency (FOUT)
they determine whether the associated variable
Sod.03 Output current (IOUT)
is included in the output message composition
of the process variables of the serial Profibus. Sod.04 Thermal protection counter (Th%)
Sod.05 Capacitor voltage (Vc)
Sod.06 Reference of speed/frequency: (No)
Sod.07 Reference of speed/frequency set (N40)
Sod.08 Reference of speed./freq. from serial
Sod.09 Torque reference (Tq0)
Sod.10 Torque feedback (Tq)
Sod.11 Power measure (P)
Sod.12 Aux1
Sod.13 Aux2
Sod.14 Word Protections (not active)
Sod.15 Word Status
Sod.16 /
For the word protections and for the word status transmitted toward the serial line see the application remark concerning the Profibus
3 communication.
7.8.17 Serial IN (Profibus)
The logic functions Sid.xx are parameters that Sid.01 Command

can acquire only the values 0 or 1 (1=ON, Sid.02 Reference speed (N0) / frequency
0=OFF): they determinate, if the associated
Sid.03 Speed / frequency ref. sum term
variable enters into the composition of the
message of Input of the process variables of the Sid.04 Limit of upper torque
serial Profibus. Sid.05 Limit of lower torque
Sid.06 Torque reference (Tq0)
Sid.07 Term in torque ref. sum
Sid.08 Proportional PID
Sid.09 Integral PID
Sid.10 Derivative PID
Sid.11 /
Sid.12 /
Sid.13 /
Sid.14 /
Sid.15 /
Sid.16 /
For the word command transmitted toward the serial line, see the application remark concerning the Profibus communication.
3
7.8.18 Diagnostics configuration
Here you can find the configuration of the diagnostic variables Aux1, Aux2 (word) and Auxb0, Auxb1 (bit). The diagnostic bits Auxb0 and Auxb1
are contained in the word STATUS (being implemented).
PARAMETER diA.01: Function Field Default
selector of assignment Aux1. It determines the meaning of the word Aux1 (visible in Mon.13). 1 ÷ 16 3
1 Analog 1 normalized (14-15) ±1024 bit
3 PID Set point (engineering units) ±1024 bit
4 PID feedback ±1024 bit
5 Speed error (FOC) ±25% Mot.03/poles
6 Idm/I_reactive /
7 Iqm/I_active /
8 Torque reference Tq0 (FOC) ±250%
9 Torque feedback Tq ±250%
10 Power measure P ±250%
11 VRMS motor voltage (V/F) Mot.05
12 (Reference from frequency signal – GEDEA board option) ±6000 RPM
13 Alarm (TRIP) /
14 Encoder impulse counting – low part /
15 / /
16 Shaft degrees 359°
selector of assignment Aux2. It determines the meaning of the word Aux2 (visible in Mon.14). 1 ÷ 16 4
3 PID set ±1024 bit
4 PID feedback (engineering units) ±1024 bit
5 Speed error (FOC) ±25% Mot.03/poles
6 Idm/I_reactive /
7 Iqm/I_active /
8 Torque reference Tq0 (FOC) ±250%
9 Torque feedback Tq ±250%
10 Power measure P ±250%
11 VRMS motor voltage (V/F) Mot.05
12 (Reference according to encoder) ±6000 RPM
13 Alarm (LAST TRIP) /
14 Encoder impulse counting – upper part /
15 / /
16 Shaft degrees 359°
selector of assignment Auxb0. it determines the meaning of the bit Auxb0 (being developed). 1 ÷ 16 1
selector of assignment Auxb1. it determines the meaning of the bit Auxb1 (being developed). 1 ÷ 16 1
address for Aux1 it sets the address of the variable set in Aux1, if diA.01=15 (being
developed)
address for Aux2 it sets the address of the variable set in Aux2, if diA.02 = 15 (being
developed)
7.8.19 Enabling of auxiliary functions
The logic functions FLo.xx are parameters that can acquire only the values 0 or 1: they enable the related functions by acquiring the value 1.
PARAMETER FLo.01 Function Field Default
Motor potentiometer function It enables the motor potentiometer function (see chap. 7.8.20). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
Restart with speed-search It enables the function of restart with speed-search (see chap. 7.8.21). 0-1 0
function (1= enabled)
auto reset function It enables the function of auto reset (see chap. 7.8.22). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
Function of tracking from It enables the function of tracking from encoder (only for special 0-1 0
encoder applications). (1= enabled)
kinetic recovery function It enables the function of kinetic recovery (see chap. 7.8.23). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
PID function It enables the function of PID (see chap. 7.8.24). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
PARAMETER FLo.08 Function
“motor pause” function It enables the function of “motor pause” (see chap. 7.8.30). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
“screwer” function It enables the function of “screwer” (see chap. 7.8.26). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
“auxiliary pumps” function It enables the function of “auxiliary pumps” (see chap. 7.8.30). 0-1 0
(1= enabled)
“speed profile” regulation It enables the function of “Speed profile”: to eight selectable speed 0-1 0
function references are associated univocally an acceleration ramp, and a (1= enabled)
deceleration ramp making needless the use of terminals to select
different ramps (see chap. 7.8.28)
7.8.20 Motor potentiometer: Fn1.xx

Should one wish to use this function proceed as follows:
• Enable the function with FLo.01 = 1.
• Select the motor potentiometer as source of speed / frequency reference with rEF.05 = 08 (Appendix C Fig. C-5).
• Assign to two of the 3 digital inputs (COM1, COM2, and COM3) the function of increase (UP) - decrease (DOWN).
If one wishes, for example, to use COM1 and COM2 select:
din.03 = 6 UP
7 (COM1)
din.04 = 7 DW
8 (COM2) GT1000
11 (+24Vcc)
REMARK
Figure 7.15
Establish with: Fn1.01 The time of ramp of the motor potentiometer (the internal ramp is always active)
Fn1.02 The full-scale of the reference with motor potentiometer
Fn1.03 The scale start of the reference with motor potentiometer
Fn1.08 Whether to use the commands of the keypad for the functions UP and DOWN
Fn1.09 Whether one wishes to store or not the last value set at shut down of GT1000
Fn1.10 Whether one wishes to store or not the last value set at the opening of the commands.
PARAMETER Fn1.01 Function Field Default

time of ramp of the motor it sets the increase of frequency on commands UP-DOWN . 0 ÷6 1
potentiometer (1=8sec, 2=16sec,
3=24sec, 4=32sec,
5=40sec, 6=48sec)
RPM/Hz with motor it determines the full-scale of the speed reference from motor -6000÷+6000RPM / +1500RPM motor 4
potentiometer = 100%. potentiometer. 0.1÷+480.0Hz. poles-50Hz / 50Hz
RPM/Hz with motor it determines the scale start of the speed reference from motor -6000÷+6000RPM / -1500RPM (motor 4
potentiometer = 0%. potentiometer. 0.1÷+480.0Hz. poles-50Hz / 0.6Hz
Motor potentiometer It indicates the position of the motor potentiometer 0.0 ÷ 100.0% 0.0%
position
Enabling 4-20mA loss Allows to enable the function of motor potentiometer tracking 0-1 0
in case of loss of the reference 4-20mA.
Selection of UP/DW Fn1.08 = 0 UP/DOWN from terminals 0-1 0
commands source Fn1.08 = 1 UP/DOWN from keypad or terminal board (in OR)
Storage of motor Fn1.09 = 0 The reference of the motor potentiometer remains 0-1 0
potentiometer reference stored when the GT1000 is disconnected.
Fn1.09 = 1 The reference from motor potentiometer restarts
from zero at each start of the inverter.
Reset of motor Fn1.10 = 0 The motor potentiometer remains stored at stop of 0-1 0
potentiometer the motor.
Fn1.10 = 1 The motor potentiometer is zeroed, when it is
given the stop command (STOP or opening of the terminal
DREN, or due to tripping of a protection).
REMARK If one sets Fn1.10 on 1, bring the scale start of the reference (Parameter Fn1.03) on a value greater than the
inverter stop span (Parameter Vvf.17)
NOTE If one wishes to store the last set value, when the voltage is disconnected, it is necessary to set on zero both Fn1.09 and
Fn1.10.
The following figure gives a sequence of commands with motor potentiometer.
Enabling
ON OFF
Run
UP command
DW command
Output
frequency
t [s]
Figure 7.16
7.8.21 Flight restart: Fn2.xx (V/F)
If one enables the inverter with the rotating motor, the discrepancy between the frequency generated by the inverter and the frequency
equivalent to the motor rotation revolutions induces high currents on the output phases with the following tripping of the overcurrent protection
("--OC") and the inverter locking.
By enabling the restart function, it is possible to restart to command the motor in free rotation (coasting).
When the start command is given, with the function enabled (FLo.02 = 1), the GT1000 starts to modulate beginning from the highest frequency
(compatible with the limits Mot.19 or Mot.20), and then reducing it to the frequency equivalent to the running motor; and then restarts to
modulate following the programmed ramp.
In the search phase, the output frequency is supplied at reduced voltage to avoid high currents elevate that would let trip the overcurrent
protection ("--OC"). When the research is completed, the voltage acquires again the value related to the V/F characteristic of the working point.
It is indispensable, for the restart operation, that the motor is running at a speed lower than the maximum speed set on the inverter.
Usually this function is necessary in case of "network failure" and machines with high coast.
In this situation, it happens what follows: the motor runs at the set speed, there is a “network failure”, the inverter reaches an alarm status "--
UU" and blocks the output commands, the motor decelerates freely, the network is restored, the inverter resets itself and starts again to
control the motor according to the modes described above.
If when the start command is given the motor is stopped, the inverter performs in any case the search, falling down to zero (Fmin), and then
restarting with the set ramp.
In the search phase, on the display appears the blinking message " Src".

ramp of search. It is the search slope of the frequency for the reset 2÷20 4
REMARK In case of systems with high coast, high values of this parameter can cause strong peaks of current and/or overvoltages on the
DC BUS during the phase of reset of the motor. The correspondence between the value set and the time in which the search is
completed until zero is expressed according to the following formula:
Mot.19 (Hz)
t(s) =
3 ⋅ Fn2.01
Time of voltage restoration It sets the speed with which the voltage on the motor is brought back to the correct 1-30 1
value, once this has been reset (see fig.7.17)
current zero This is the waiting time for the confirmation of the occurred reset. 10÷100ms 40ms
acknowledgment waiting.
REMARK A very much shorter time can lead to “false resets”, i.e. researches that complete themselves at a frequency even significantly
higher than that of motor rotation. On the contrary, a long time can make the search difficult or longer.
Reduction of voltage in This is the reduced voltage associated to the frequency in the phase of search. 10÷70% 20%
search.
REMARK As for the parameter Fn2.01 it is better to use a low value in case of systems with high coast, in order to avoid transistors at high
current. On the contrary, a very low value in case of coast can make the search difficult.
Demagnetization waiting Waiting time before starting the function of automatic search 0,0÷2,0s 1,0s
PARAMETRO Fn2.06 Function Field Default
Soglia corrente attiva Torque current threshold for catching confirmation (250=5%) 180÷2000 250
REMARK The torque current must be lower than the threshold value during the waiting time(Fn2.03). The default value (250) is equivalent
to 5% of motor rated current. A parameter value too small may make difficult or longer the search phase.
selection of speed search If it is foreseen the encoder, with the function of flight restart enabled, the 0-1 0
procedure. parameter allows to select the procedure of motor reset.
If there is the encoder and Fn2.09=1 is not in the search phase, but the reset is
instantaneous (also if the motor rotates counterclockwise).
With dedicated software (speed feedback) this parameter enables/disables the
rotation function.
REMARK With the parameter on 1 it is fundamental to enter the right number of the motor poles (Parameter Mot.21).
START
Motor speed
fMAX fRIF
Output frequency
Fn2.01
Output voltage
Fn2.04
Fn2.02
Active current
5%
Fn2.05 Fn2.03 t [s]

Figure 7.17
7.8.22 Auto reset: Fn3.xx

The function foresees the automatic reset of the hardware protections by the microcontroller. The GT1000 is
3 supplied with this function disabled, therefore this reset can occur only with command from terminal board:
external command (terminal COM3 programmed by default on 16).
The microprocessor has a hardware pre-arrangement to perform the reset of the hardware protections (jumper JPL closed). Usually only by
switching-off and restarting the inverter it is possible to reset the drive. Use this method, if the autoreset can be dangerous for persons and things.
By default, the function is disabled, it can be enabled at software level by setting on 1 the parameter FLo.03 (it is not necessary to switch off and
restart the device). The function works as follows:
After a given time from the tripping of a protection, set by Fn3.05, the inverter performs a first attempt of auto-reset. If this succeeds and there are not
other protections tripped within 10 minutes, the attempt No. 1 is "forget" and everything returns to be as nothing had ever happened. The removed
alarm is stored in Mon.18.
If after having reset (or attempted to reset) the alarm for the first time the inverter trips again, after other Fn3.05 seconds it is performed the second
reset; if it trips for the third time, when other Fn3.05 seconds have elapsed, it resets again (third attempt). At this point, there are two possibilities:
1. in the time span of 10 minutes from the tripping of the first protection on other protections have tripped and the inverter is returned to the normal
operation with one or two or three attempts of reset. After 10 minutes are elapsed, the inverter zeroes the timer pre-arranging itself for an eventual
other cycle of three attempts.
2. 10 minutes from the tripping of the first protection have not elapsed, three auto-reset attempts have been used and there is a fourth protection
tripping. The inverter does not perform any further autoreset action, and it is necessary to perform an external reset (terminal XX) or a switching-off
and restart. In both cases, the inverter zeroes the timer and prearranges itself for a new cycle.
A reset at programmed terminal or a switching-off leads always the procedure back to the starting point also if only one or two attempts have been
made.
Automatic reset alarm pause Waiting time between a reset attempt and the next one. 1 ÷ 30 s 1s
Temporary mains failure With the parameter at zero, the 3 autoreset attempts are performed for 0÷1 0
autoreset alarm “--UU” any type of tripped alarm. If Fn3.09=1, the autoreset acts only on the
alarm “--UU” that usually occurs in presence of a “failure” of the
network voltage.
7.8.23 Speed reference from encoder (FOC): Fn4.xx
The function is available if the GT1000 is equipped with optional board “GEDEA”.
GEDEA board (“2nd encoder”) allows the reading of the encoder installed on the motor and the management of a second encoder used as
inverter speed reference. For installation detail see chapter 6.3.
To enable the function you must select the field oriented control (drv.07=2) and FLo.04 = 1 (it is not necessary to switch off and on the inverter );
after these selections the parameters of the Fn4 family (Frequency reference) are available
The speed reference from encoder must be selected setting the parameter rEF.05 or rEF.06 to 7 as is possibile to check from block diagram F5
(Appendix C ) or from parameters rEF description.
Digital Filter It filter the encoder signal to minimize possibile noises. The setted value 1=10ms, 4
corresponds to the filter constant time. 2=25ms,
3=50ms,
4=100ms,
5=200ms
Gain It increase or decrease the measured value to desired value -300.00 ÷ +300.00 % 0
NOTE It allows to achieve the rated value if the pulses per revolution of the master encoder shall be different from 1024 or if the gear ratio shall
be different from 1. The negative field allows to change the sign of the measured value without to modify the encoder connections
Offset It adds the setted revolutions to the measured value with the sign of the same 0-100 RPM 0
(without sign)
NOTE It allow to add a fixed term to the measured value. If the measured value is negative, the term is added with the same sign. If the measured
value is ≥ 0 the amount is a normal sum.
Sleep correction Set the increment or the decrement in % of the speed reference (downstream 0 ÷ 100.0 % 0
the gain and offset).
NOTE It allows to change the speed reference (from frequency signal) with analogic signal from an analogic input of the control board (GSCMA). It
is possible to use analog input 1 (terminals XM1-14,15) or analog input 2 la 2 (terminals XM1-16,17).
To enable the sleep correction set the parameter Ain.13 or Ain.14 to 8 respectively.
(Vanal) Input voltage value = 5Vdc: no speed reference variation.
(Vanal) Input voltage value = 0 - 10Vdc: speed reference variation according:
Vanal− 5 V Fn 4.04
%= ⋅
5V 100
Note: The maximum value of Fn4.04 = 100, so with maximum decrement it is possibile to reduce the speed reference to zero, but it is not
possibile the invert the polarity.
Additional Term It may be added or subtract to the reference without changing the reference sign. 0-500 RPM 0
NOTE It is possibile to do temporary variation of the speed reference according the value setted with Fn4.05 parameter .
I1 = ON : speed reference increasing. I2 = ON speed reference decreasing.
If the value of Fn4.05 is greater than the base speed reference value the resulting reference will be =0. The signal inversion is not allowed.
The three inputs I1, I2, I3 allow the loop recovery and the inversion of the reference sign coming from the board and are coupled to the digital inputs
of the drive sono abbinati agli ingressi digitali dell'inverter (7, 8, 9 terminals) previously configured. The possibile configurations are the following.
Input I1: din.xx= 17 Input I2: din.xx= 18 Input I3: din.xx= 19
Setting the parameters diA.01 or diA.02 to 12, it is possibile to show the revolutions measured by the GEDEA board (upstream of the various gain,
offset, etc..) from Mon.13 or Mon.14 respectively.
7.8.24 Kinetic recovery (V/F): Fn5.xx
This function foresees that after a mains failure the motor control is not lost, but it is performed automatically a ramp stop until the motor itself is
stopped.
To keep the control also with mains failure, it is necessary to keep the voltage on the DC BUS at an acceptable value which must be higher than the
undervoltage threshold (--UU) of the inverter. Since the kinetic energy of the rotating machine is very high (this is the meaning of the kinetic recovery)
the voltage on the bus can be kept high recovering the energy from the load by means of a controlled deceleration of the motor. The lack of mains
voltage can be short or long. In both cases, the deceleration once it has started has to be completed until the stop (safety regulations). This function
does not foresee the recovery of the acceleration ramp if during the stop mains is restored.
At the end of the stop procedure, the inverter switches off, and, if the mains is really failed or, if the failure has been short and the mains has been
restored, it reaches the tripped protection status showing on the display the message “I-PF” (Instantaneous Power Failure).
This protection can be reset usually by acting on the terminal configured as alarm reset.
During the stop phase during mains failure, the threshold of undervoltage protection tripping “—UU” is automatically lowered by the software,
independently from the parameters drv.05 and drv.08, so that the control of the motor can be kept as long as possible.
The function activates by setting the parameter FLo.05=1.

Frequency stage Once the mains failure has been detected, the stop procedure starts and it 0.0-20.0Hz 0.5Hz
is immediately performed a (single) frequency decrease with a stage
having a value equal to Fn5.01
REMARK A too high value, especially in case of significantly high coasts can lead to a tripping of the protection “—OC”.
The value can be selected by observing the trend of the voltage on the DC BUS at mains failure.
DC BUS Voltage reference It sets the reference of the voltage on the BUS during the stop ramp 500-850Vdc 690Vdc

Braking voltage Braking voltage during the stop ramp 680-800Vdc 680Vdc

Guide ramp The function follows the stop ramp set in parameter Fn5.05 which is then 1.2-800.0s 2.0s
corrected by the term generated by the PI regulator that keeps the voltage
on the BUS at the value of Fn5.02.
REMARK Remark: it is important to calibrate correctly the guide ramp since it allows the PI regulator to work only for
small slope corrections according to the voltage on the BUS.
Buffer length Length of the buffer for the calculation of the mains voltage 1-50 30
REMARK It can be helpful to increase the buffer to 40 or 50. It is not so profitable to reduce it

Sensor sensitiveness in Minimum variation of the mains voltage to enable the function of recovery 5-55Vdc 18Vdc
Volt
REMARK It can be necessary to decrease the value to 15 or 20. A too low value makes the sensor too sensitive and there
can also be sudden stops, even without mains failures. Very high values make the sensor indifferent to mains
failures and exclude the function.
Insensitiveness in number / 1-50 3
of cycles at 2ms
REMARK It shall not be set too high because the alarm “—UU” would trip before detecting the failure. It is also not easy to
succeed in keeping it at 1 without it continues to detect false failures. The good values range from 2 to 5. It can be
useful to use 4 or 5 if the reading of the voltage on the bus should be a little bit disturbed.
REMARK The parameters for the calibration of the software sensor (Fn5.07, 08, 09) are enabled only on the sizes from
S1GT003 up to S1GT028. For higher sizes they have no effect, since it is enabled only a hardware network sensor.
Proportional gain Proportional gain of the regulator of the voltage of the DC BUS 0-8000 100
Ramp start integral gain Integral gain of the regulator of the voltage of the DC BUS at start of the 0-650 4
stop
Ramp end integral gain Integral gain of the regulator of the voltage of the DC BUS at the end of the 0-650 40
stop
Mains software sensor (sizes <S1GT033)

When an inverter is controlling a load and the mains fails, a rapid discharge of the filter capacitors occurs. The natural consequence is the tripping of
the undervoltage protection of the DC BUS (--UU). The time during which it remains controlled, the motor depends on different factors:
- value of the tripping threshold of the undervoltage protection (--UU)
- value of the voltage at which the DC BUS was before the mains failure
- value of the filter capacity present on the bus itself
- value of the current that is acquired from the bus itself
This time can be quantified in some milliseconds, and is approximately independent from the size of the inverter since the ratio between the rated
current and the capacity of the capacitors is usually always the same. Within this time, it is necessary to:
- acknowledge the mains failure
- perform the deceleration to recover energy from the load
It is important to remember that a decrease of the continuous voltage can in any case be caused by different events:
- a waiving of the mains voltage
- a sudden load increase
- the end of a deceleration
The function of kinetic recovery, by means of the “software sensor” has to be suitably calibrated (parameters Fn5.07, Fn5.08 and Fn5.09), it must
discriminate the mains failure from normal oscillations of the continuous voltage.
Management of the stop ramp.

Once the mains failure is detected, the stop procedure starts and it is immediately performed a (single) frequency decrease with a stage having a
value equal to Fn5.01. A too high value, especially with significantly high coasts can lead to a tripping of the protection “—OC”. The value has to
be selected by observing the trend of the voltage on the DC BUS. This stage should rapidly increase the voltage on the DC BUS.
Once this operation has been performed, the software performs a stop ramp set in parameter Fn5.05 that is corrected from the term generated
from a PI regulator that adjusts the voltage on the BUS. Therefore, the ramp slope is corrected in order to keep the Vdc at a value close to the
one that is selected and set in Fn5.02 (in volt dc). It is important to calibrate correctly the guide ramp since it allows the PI regulator to work
only for small slope corrections according to the voltage on the BUS. It is helpful to keep the voltage at a high value, since at the end of the
deceleration the energy recovery becomes even less consistent and only that accumulated on the bus keeps the inverter active. If one wishes
to perform a stop with a given time, one has to use the braking switch, therefore one has to set the voltage Fn5.02 on a value higher than the
braking threshold that, during the phase of kinetic recovery, is independent from drv.05 and directly adjustable by means of Fn5.03.
Calibration of the regulator.

The values of the PI regulator gains have to be selected verifying the trend of the stop ramp and of the voltage Vdc preferably with the oscilloscope.
For the setting of the ramp are available 3 parameters:
Fn5.10 = proportional gain indicative value: 100
Fn5.11 = descent start integral gain indicative value: 4
Fn5.12 = descent end integral gain indicative value: 40
It is suggested to set rLo.14 = 1 in order to exclude the function of “limitation of the braking ramp” and to let that the ramp itself is freely controlled by
the PI regulator. This allows shorter stop times, if one uses the braking resistor.
Should one instead wish to obtain the controlled stop without being equipped of the braking, one should keep enabled the limitation and therefore let
rLo.14 = 0. In this case, the stop times are inevitably longer.
For the setting it is suggested to use an oscilloscope and the analog output.
7.8.25Pid function: Fn6.xx
The P.I.D. regulator allows to vary the drive frequency reference (and therefore the motor revolutions) in order to regulate a given plant
quantity (with low dynamics) that can be external (temperature, pressure, flow rate,.) or internal to the inverter (motor current).
Use modes
The enabling of the P.I.D. occurs with the logic FLo.06 set on 1 (it is not necessary to reset the inverter) and the closure of one of the digital
inputs previously configured for this function (din.03÷din.05 equal to 11).
When the set input closes, it is performed the zeroing of the variables of the PID and the start of the regulation.
The output of the PID sums, with sign, to the frequency reference by setting rEF.15=4 e rEF.16=100 (see block diagram F5 Appendix1).
Using rEF.16 it is possible to determine the scale of the PID output frequency. By setting rEF.16≠100 one obtains ±50Hz when the output of
the P.I.D. acquires the ±100%, while one would reach ±128Hz when the output reaches its maximum value (256%).
With the parameters Fn6.14 and Fn6.15 enabled (set on 1), it is possible to limit to zero respectively the positive and the negative output of the
regulator (for example, if one wishes that the P.I.D. performs only an increase on the reference set and not a decrease it is enough to set
Fn6.15=1).
Thanks to the parameter Fn6.01 one selects the set point, while with Fn6.02 one determines the source of the feedback signal.
Both the reference and the feedback can come from one of the two analog inputs (0÷±10V, 0÷+10V respectively). In one case (selection 2-3),
the quantity is converted with sign (10bits of resolution).
The two inputs can be configured in current 4÷20mA by setting Ain.15 or Ain.16 on the value 3.
The parameter Fn6.10 is a digital value reference settable in a range between 0 and 200%. With Fn6.10 = 100.0% and with the feedback
coming from one of the two 2 analog inputs, the error reset occurs with about +5 volt at the input.
One can in any case, by means of Fn6.08, vary the gain of the feedback signal.
It is possible to control the current on the motor by setting Fn6.02=6: if one uses the internal set-point Fn6.10 adjusted on 100%, at inverter’s
output one would try to keep constant the rated current INP of the GT1000.
With Fn6.03 it’s possible to limit in module the maximum applicable error, while with Fn6.12=1 you invert the sign of the same.
The regulator updating time is calculated automatically according to the integral time constant (Fn6.06) and to the derivative time constant
(Fn6.07), although a minimum time of 8ms remains set. The time set in this way can be divided for 2, for 4, for 8, or for 16 increasing the value
of the parameter Fn6.04 (0, 1, 2, 3, and 4).
It is possible to let a digital output (R5) trip (configured with dot.01÷dot.03 equal to 5), when the regulator output exceeds the set threshold by
means of the parameter Fn6.09.
The parameter Fn6.18 allows to limit the integral term in percentage of the total regulator output avoiding saturation phenomena.
The block diagram of the regulator gives the variation fields of the most meaningful internal variables.
PID reference selection it selects the reference of the PID regulator 1-5 1
1 Internal reference: 0.1 -200.0% (Fn6.10)
2 First analog (*) (*) See block
3 Second analog (*) diagram
4-5 /
selection of PID feedback it selects the feedback (or quantity controlled by the PID) 1-6 6
1 0
2 First analog (*) (*) See block
3 Second analog (*) diagram
4-5 /
6 Average output current
Maximum PID error it determines in module the maximum error acting on the PID regulator 0.1 ÷ 100.0 100.0
PID updating time With the parameter on 0, the updating time is calculated automatically 0÷4 0
according to the times in Fn6.06 and Fn6.07. With the parameter set on 1, 2,
3, 4 one updates the regulator output within a time of 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 or 1/16
respectively of the calculated one (min.=8ms).
proportional gain (KP). it sets PID proportional gain. With an error of 1% and a gain of the 100.00%, the 0.00 ÷ 250.00 2.00 %
PID output value is 100% (12800 ≡ 100%). With rEF.16=100 the relation PID %
output (100%) - frequency is: 100% output PID → 50.0Hz.

constant of integral it determines the time in which the error is brought at output with proportional 0.0 - 599.9s, 6.0s
time (TI). gain = 1.00. The integral gain is I = ∝ KP / Fn6.06, therefore inversely 600.0s
proportional to Fn6.06 !!!
REMARK By setting 600.0s the integral function is suppressed.
constant of derivative it determines the derivation coefficient. The derivative gain is D = ∝ KP * 0.0s ÷ 300.0s 0.0s
time (TD). Fn6.07, therefore directly proportional to Fn6.07.
REMARK By setting 0.00 the derivative function is suppressed
H feedback. It can e sued to adjust the value of the quantity adjusted to the reference parity 50.0 ÷ 250.0 100.0 = no
(for the analogs can be used the related calibration gains). variation
PID tripping threshold when the PID output exceeds this threshold the internal bit R5 is set. -250% ÷ 250% 0.0
for bit set
Internal PID reference. This is the internal digital reference of the regulator: By setting 100.0% one 0 ÷ 200% 0.0
wishes to regulate the rated value of the controlled quantity.
REMARK The voltage selection is not available.
Adjusted quantity it determines the controlling quantity 0= freq. /revol. 0
(V o F). 1= voltage
REMARK The voltage selection is not available.
PID error inversion it determines the inversion of the PID error 0= does not invert 0
1=inverts.
regulation on f or df it determines whether the output PID adjusts before or after the ramp 0= f(before), 0
1= df(after)
REMARK The selection after the ramp is not available.
PID positive output It deletes the positive output of the PID ( there is only the subtraction of the 1= deleted. 0
suppression frequency).
PID negative output It deletes the PID negative output ( there is only the frequency sum). 1= deleted. 0
suppression
Full-scale engineering Serve a set the full-scale for the reading of the reference and of the feedback 1÷6000 1000
reading in engineering units
AUTO-START/STOP Enable the AUTO-START/STOP function: 0-1 0
Enabling the drive is stopped if the regulated quantity is greater than the reference of the
threshold setted with PMP.03 r and is restarted if the regulated quantity is lower
than the reference of the threshold setted with PMP.01.
The values of PMP.03 and PMP.01 are entered in % of the reference.
I limitation It limits the maximum value of the integral term 5÷128% 60%
REMARK With the parameter at default value, the integral action is limited to 60% of the PID output. (7680). Therefore, if
rEF.16=100.0% the maximum of the integral contribution is ±30Hz.
Fn6.01
16383
GT1000
1
Fn6.10 2048
2000 F_RIF
KP 1
+2048 8 F_ADD
-10V
+10V XM1
-2048 8 9 10 11 12
Fn6.03 Fn6.12
-16383
-1
1
Z
XM1 +2048
2 Ain.15
16-17 2
din.01÷05=11
1024 16383 Fn6.18 ABILITATION
3 1000
-10V +10V 16383 128 Fn6.14=1 32766
ABILITATION
0
+2048 EXITPID
SET PID ERROR
+ 12800 @ 100%
±2048 ±1024
KP 500 rEF16 F PID
100 TI 12800 100 (HZx10)
-1
IMGT10002EN-September 06
0
-
4mA 20mA 1
-1
+2048
-16383 -16383 Fn6.18 0 Fn6.15=1 -32766 0
-10V 128
+10V REAZ PID/FEED BACK
±2048
-2048
16383
XM1
1 Fn6.08
XM1 +2048 1000
3 Ain.16 R5 RELE'
18-19 2 dot.01=5
26-28
3 dot.02=5
8
-10V +10V KP 10 TD dot.03=5
8 9
Fn6.09
-1 ERROR 1
+2048 Z 15
-16383
0
4mA 20mA
KP=Fn6.05
TI=Fn6.06
TD=Fn6.07
+2048 +2048 +2048 +2048

+2048 +2048
-10V -10V
+10V +10V
2048
-2048 -10V +10V 0 -2048 -10V +10V 0 2Inominale
4mA 20mA 4mA 20mA
2 2
1 3 1 3
Ain.15 Ain.16
Fn6.02
1 2 3 6
XM1 XM1
0 Iout
16-17 18-19
101
Startup-test-display and programming
7.8.26 Miscellany 1: Fn7.xx
Function of “Macro Enabling”

The parameter Fn7.09 allows to enable some programming procedures in simplified way and without need to modify individually different
parameters. The macro called “Pc232” works in the following way. To enable it, one needs to go to parameter Fn7.09 and to display its
content: the display shows the message “Macro”. In condition of terminal DREN (term. 10) not enabled, it is possible to modify the value of the
parameter by pressing the key UP. The message on the display becomes “Pc232”. At this point, or with a further pressure of the key MODE
UP or simply by releasing the keypad push-buttons, the software performs the modification and the storage of the following parameters:
S-L.01=1 serial ANSI S-L.02=0 serial enabling
S-L.03=1 commands only from terminal board S-L.05=0 RS232 on telephone connector (X3)
S-L.10=1 disabling BCC S-L.11=0 even parity
S-L.12=9600 baud rate S-L.13=1 inverter address
Therefore, it performs automatically a reset of the inverter and starts the function that allows a rapid connection to the serial 232 of a PC by
means of the telephone connector X3 (for the serial protocol and the connections, see the chapter 8.8).
Function of “Screwer” (FOC)
PARAMETER function unit min. max. default Ser.ind.

FLo.09 Enabling of the function / 0 1 0 393
Fn7.07 Torque selector / 0 1 0 263
Fn7.08 Tightening torque % 0.00 180.00 100.00 111
The function is enabled only with the vectorial control (FOC).

It is used on applications in which it is necessary to disable the inverter, if the supplied torque exceeds a pre-set value. Typical application: the
control of the tightening torque of a screwer. The maximum torque is established by means of a threshold from analog 2 (terminal 16) or from
digital parameter Fn7.08. The selection between the two occurs by means of the logic Fn7.07.
In phase of ramp, the function is disabled; at ramp end, if the supplied torque exceeds the threshold, the inverter disables and signals the
tripping on a previously programmed digital output (dot.01÷dot.03 on 7).
After the tripping of the function, to restart, it is necessary to remove the run(terminal 5) and to command it again obtaining in this way the re-
opening of the limits of torque and the restoration of the eventually previously set relay.
In Mon.11 it is possible to display the supplied torque.
By default (Fn7.07=0), the torque threshold is taken from the analog 2: in this case, to 10V (or 20mA) corresponds a torque equal to 180% of
the commanded motor rated torque.
Function of “Voltage reduction on the motor” (V/F)

PARAMETER function unit min. max. default Ser. ind.
Fn7.10 Voltage reduction ramp s 0.01 1.00 0.50 249
Fn7.11 Voltage restoration ramp s 0.01 1.00 0.50 250
Fn7.12 Gain of reduced voltage % 50 100 100 251
The function is enabled with a digital input configured for this purpose by setting on 13 the parameter “din.xx” to which the input itself
corresponds.
The parameters Fn7.10 and Fn7.11 set respectively the time in which occurs the voltage reduction and the time in which occurs the restoration
of full voltage. They are expressed directly in seconds with tenths and hundredths. The parameter Fn7.12 sets instead the % value of the
reduced voltage and can range from maximum 100 (default) to minimum 50%.
Open command Open Command
Cl. Command
Vvf.01 Motor voltage
Fn7.12
Fn7.10 Fn7.11
7.8.27 Compliance function (FOC)
It is used in those applications in which the following situation may occur:

a. COMPLIANCE DURING SUPPLY. The speed of the motor (M1), controlled by the inverter, decalibrate in excess with reference to the upstream
(in the cinematic chain) motor (M2): the motor M1 tries to drag the motor M2 with a resulting increase of supplied torque (current) and possible
overload. The enabling of the “compliance” reduces the speed of the motor M1 according to the supplied torque.
b. COMPLIANCE DURING RECOVERY. The speed of the motor (M2), controlled by the inverter, decalibrate in defect with reference to the
downstream (in the cinematic chain) motor (M1): the inverter that controls the motor M2 withstands to the dragging by braking and this results in
an excessive work of the braking circuit or in the overvoltage protection tripping, if the dynamic braking is foreseen. The enabling of the
“compliance” increases the speed of the motor M2 according to the torque of braking.
Three parameters rEv.09, rEv.10 and rEv.11, are involved as well as the digital input enabled with regards to eh function "compliance". The
input is configured by setting on 10 the corresponding parameter (din.03÷din.05=10): it shall then be closed towards the terminal 14 (common
24Vcc).
The function can be non symmetrical, in the sense that the characteristic during supply (i.e. with positive active current) can be diversified with
reference to the one during recovery (i.e. with negative active current). During supply, the parameter that sets the correspondence between
the active current and the revolutions decrease is the rEv.10. During recovery instead, the active parameter is the rEv.11.
Moreover, it is possible to enable the positive compliance only above a given value of active current. The threshold is established by the parameter
rEv.09.
rEv.10 = compliance during supply range: 0 + 20.0 %
rEv.09 = threshold of tripping (only during supply) range: 0 + 20.0 %
rEv.11 = compliance during recovery range: 0 + 20.0 %
The following formulas give the actual variation of revolutions according to the above-mentioned parameters and to the torque demand in %
(TP≡Mon.11). They contain the variable RPMN=rated motor revolutions corresponding to parameter Mot.04.
During supply one would have:  TP − rEV.09  rEV.10 
∆∆rev. =  ∗  ∗ RPMN
 100 − rEV.09  100 
During recovery instead:  TP rEV.11
∆rev =  ∗  ∗ RPMN
100 100 
The effective ∆revolutions has then the suitable sign, i.e. according to the motor revolution sign there will be always during supply a decrease
of revolutions and during recovery there will be always an increase of the absolute value of the revolutions.
Example: With a rotation in the positive direction of the revolutions, assuming the following values for the parameters
rEv.09 = threshold of tripping (only during supply) value: 50.0%
rEv.10 = compliance during supply value: 10.0%
rEv.11 = compliance during recovery value: 20.0%
Mot.04 = RPMN motor rated revolutions value: 1450rpm
If TP = 80% (i.e. during supply) one has:  80 − 50 10  (6% of RPMN.)
∆∆rev. =  ∗  ∗1450 = 87rpm
 50 100 
Instead with TP = -80% (i.e. during braking) one has:  80 20  (16% of RPMN.)
∆rev. =  ∗  ∗1450 = 232rpm
100 100 
With a TP equal to 100% one will always obtain a ∆revolutions in % equal to the percentage set in the parameter of compliance active.
∆ revol.
rEv.10
100 %
Braking torque Driving torque
rEv.09 100 %
rEv.11
Figure 7.19
7.8.28 Function of “Speed profile”
With this function, it is possible to assign to the command bits CF1, CF2, CF3 the double function of reference selectors and of ramps selectors
(simultaneously). In this way, it is possible to have actually 8 speed references each of them having its own acceleration ramp and its own
deceleration.
To obtain this, set on 1 the parameter FLo.16. In this way, the commands CF1, CF2 and CF3 perform the usual selection of the reference and in
addition, they carry out also the selection of the ramps acting also as RP1, RP2, and RP3.
The commands RP1, RP2 (should they be enabled by for ex. the bit2 and bit3 of the command-word) are not important, i.e. it is possible not to
configure the bits (RIFIN1 and RIFIN2) as selectors of ramps, since they would not be in any case enabled by the software.
These bits remain therefore free to be assigned to other function commands.
Summing up: having set FLo.16=1 the following selection applies
COMMANDS REFERENCE RAMPS

CF3 CF2 CF1 Accel Decel
0 0 0 selet. rEF.05 rPS.01 rPS.09
0 0 1 selet. rEF.06 rPS.02 rPS.10
0 1 0 rEF.09 rPS.03 rPS.11
0 1 1 rEF.10 rPS.04 rPS.12
1 0 0 rEF.11 rPS.05 rPS.13
1 0 1 rEF.12 rPS.06 rPS.14
1 1 0 rEF.13 rPS.07 rPS.15
1 1 1 rEF.14 rPS.08 rPS.16
rPS.08 rPS.15
rEF.14
rEF.13 rEF.13
rPS.07 rPS.14 rEF.12
rEF.12
rPS.06 rPS.13
rEF.11 rEF.11
rPS.05 rPS.12 rEF.10
rEF.10
rPS.04 rPS.11
rEF.09 rEF.09
rPS.03 rPS.10
selez. rEF.06 selez. rEF.06
rPS.02 rPS.09
selez. rEF.05 selez. rEF.05
rPS.01 rPS.09
START t
STOP
Figure 7.20
7.8.29 Motor thermal protection by means of PTC or NTC

For the management of the motor thermal protection by means of PTC (or NTC) one uses the analog 1 (terminals 14-15) or 2 (terminal 16). If
one uses the analog 1, it is possible to supply the thermal probe with the 10 volts present on the control board of the inverter closing on the
board itself the jumper JP2, which brings 10V to terminal 14 by means of a resistor in series of 1kΩ (figure A).
Using the analog 2, it’s necessary to supply the temperature sensor with an external voltage using a resistor (figure B) or the +10V to terminal
13.
+ 10V
R=1k +
R
JP2
CLOSED 16
14 PTC
(NTC) GT1000
PTC GT1000 CONTROL CARD
(NTC) CONTROL CARD
17
15
17
Fig. A Fig. B
It is necessary to set: Ain.13 = 7 if one uses the analog 1
Ain.14 = 7 if one uses the analog 2
Two parameters to set the tripping thresholds are foreseen:
Ain.18 = threshold of ALARM.
The GT1000 is not disabled, the relay “DRIVE OK” remains energized.
It is possible to obtain on a logic output, configured to this purpose (dot.01÷dot.03=6), the information of tripped alarm.
Ain.19 = threshold of PROTECTION.
The GT1000 is disabled, the relay “DRIVE OK” de-energizes and the display shows the protection –Ptc–.
To restart, it is necessary that the motor temperature decreases under the value of Ain.19 and to reset the GT1000 (terminal 7-8-9
programmed on 16).
CALIBRATION OF THE THRESHOLDS
The two thresholds Ain.18 and Ain.19 are set in volt according to the following formula: VS = 10 RPTC
+ PTC or VS = 10 RNTC
+NTC
PTC or NTC is the ohmic value that the sensor acquires at alarm temperature or at protection temperature.
PTC The threshold of alarm is set at a voltage lower than the one of protection.
For example, by setting Ain.18 = 6.00 when the motor temperature increases as to let fall on the PTC more than 6 volt, the
configured digital output trips. If then also the voltage of protection tripping set by means of Ain.19 is exceeded, the inverter locks
(the relay “DRIVE OK” trips: terminals 1-2) and the display shows the message “-Ptc-“.
NTC In this case, one sets the threshold of alarm at a voltage higher than that of protection.
For example, by setting Ain.18 = 8.00 when the motor temperature increases as to let fall on the NTC less then 8 volts, the
configured digital output trips signaling the high temperature on the motor. If then the value falls under the voltage of protection
tripping (Ain.19), the inverter locks (the relay “DRIVE OK” trips: terminals 1-2) and the display shows the message “-Ptc-“.
V V
Vin
Ain.1 Ain.1
Vin
Ain.1 Ain.1
t [s] t [s]
Alarm Alarm
Protection Protection
Enabl. Enabl.
P
PTC NTC
7.8.30 Functions for the control of the pumping systems: PMP.xx
Premise
These functions, active in scale control (V/F), have been developed specifically for pumping systems.
In detail, the function “auxiliary pumps” allows to manage, together with the pump under inverter control, further two auxiliary pumps connected
directly to the network that are switched on alternatively when the plant flow rate requires it, in order to keep constant the pressure within an
adjustable tolerance band.
PMP.03
Set pressare =100%
PMP.01
The function of "motor pause" allows to stop automatically the motor of the pump controlled by the inverter (main pump), when this works
under a given flow rate or when the latter is null. When the plant conditions requires it, there is the automatic restart of the motor. This allows
to spare energy keeping the pump operating only when needed.
Besides these functions, there are further available functions, which are useful in the applications where the inverter controls a pump.
Function of “auxiliary pumps”

The following table gives the parameters concerning this function: the logic FLo.10 set on 1 allows its enabling (it works together with the
internal PID regulator):
Table of parameters:
Parameter Function unit min. max default Ser. Ind.
PMP.01 Switching-on threshold % 10.0 100.0 90.0 152
PMP.02 Waiting time for 2nd pump start s 1 250 5 285
PMP.03 Switching-off threshold % 100.0 180.0 110.0 153
PMP.04 Waiting time for 2nd pump stop s 1 250 5 286
PMP.05 Number of auxiliary pumps / 1 2 1 277
dot.01÷03 Selectors of digital outputs / 9-10 /
Main diagram
Main pump
GT1000 M3
∼
(from pressure transducer)

4÷20mA
rete M3
∼
Auxiliary
pumps
M3
∼
Figure 7.21
The scope of the function is that of “helping” the P.I.D. regulator to keep the plant pressure within a tolerance band with reference on the set-
point set, by enabling or disabling the auxiliary pumps according to the required water flow rate.
The switching-on of the first auxiliary pump occurs once that the plant pressure (displayed in Mon.14) falls with reference to the set-point
(displayed in Mon.13) of the percentage set in parameter PMP.01. In case a) the enabling of the first auxiliary pump, has brought the pressure
above the threshold PMP.01 within the time set by PMP.02 (case a).
Instead, in case of high water demand (high flow rate), if the enabling of the first pump does not succeed in bringing the pressure above the
lower threshold, after the time set in PMP.02 there is the enabling of the second pump (case b). The following figure shows the two cases:
Set point Mon.13 Set point Mon.13
P.= Mon.14 P.= Mon.14
PMP.01 PMP.02 PMP.0 PMP.0
ON ON
Pump 1 Pump 1
ON
Pump 2 OFF Pump 2
Case a Case b
The eventual disabling of a pump occurs when the pressure increases over the set-point of the percentage set in parameter PMP.03
(switching-off threshold).
Should this situation occur with both pumps enabled, the switching-off of the first pump is immediate, while the switching-off of the second
depends on the value reached by the pressure after a settable time (parameter PMP.04). After this time has elapsed, if the pressure falls
under the disabling threshold, i.e. comes back into the tolerance band, the pump remains open (Case c), otherwise also this pump is stopped
(Case d).
This avoids to switch off both pumps, and to have then to restart one immediately.
PMP.03 PMP.03
PMP.04 PMP.04
P.= Mon.14 P.=
Set point Mon.13 Set point Mon.13
Pump 1 Pump 1
OFF OFF
Pump 2 ON Pump 2
OFF
Case c Case d
In general, therefore PMP.01 shall correspond to about the minimum pressure at which the plant can operate, while PMP.03 shall correspond
to the maximum pressure.
Finally, it shall be remembered that the inverter enables alternatively the two service pumps, in order to exploit equally the system.
The parameter PMP.05 sets the number of auxiliary pumps: should it use just one, the switching-off and the start occur without waiting times,
but in any case the times PMP.02 and PMP.04 determine times during which there cannot be switching procedures.
The display in Mon.13 and Mon.14 respectively of the set point and of the plant pressure occur in engineering units using the conversion
parameter Fn6.16.
Function of “motor pause”

The following table gives the parameters concerning the ”motor pause”: the logic FLo.08 set on 1 enables the function (it works together with
the internal PID regulator).
Table parameters:
Parameter function Unit min. max default Ser. Ind.
PMP.06 Current of switching-off % 0 95 40 287
PMP.07 Pressure of restart % 5.0 100.0 80.0 154
PMP.08 Pre-pause time s 0 300 10 155
PMP.09 Pre-pause PID reference % 0.0 200.0 115.0 156
If the water need is very little the drive decrease the revolutions of the main pump at the minimum value; in this situation shall be useful to stop
the motor.
There are possible two way of the motor automatic stop of the main pump (motor controlled by the drive).
PMP.06 different from 0 (default): the motor stops when the active output current of the drive is lower than or equal to the one set ted
by PMP.06 (in % of the rated motor current) for a time expressed in seconds setted by PMP.08.
In this case the parameter PMP.06 determines the flow value (flow rate) that leads the system to switching-off. In phase of calibration
it can be useful to read the active current in parameter Mon.11 (rated motor current value≡100%).
PMP.06=0: the motor stops when the output frequency of the drive is lower than the minimum value (rEF.07) for the time setted by
PMP.08.
Before switching-off, the set-point of the P.I.D. regulator of the inverter is temporarily increased of a percentage that depends on the parameter
PMP.09 (100% = no increase): in the pressurization plants, this increase extends the duration of the pause times avoiding repeated enabling
and disabling operations.
In the pause phase, the P.I.D. regulator remains active, as a matter of fact, when the pressure falls again under the level set by PMP.07 (in
percentage to the set-point) the inverter restarts the motor accelerating it up to reach the frequency reference itself.
The diagram shows an operation sequence, with the P.I.D. regulator used to control the pressure.
PMP.09
P [Bar]
SET Pressure
Mon.13
Pressure
PMP.07 Mon.14
Press. restart
Mon.11 [%] t (s)
PMP.06
Switching-off current
Run/Stop t (s)
Run Run
Stop
PMP.08 (s) t (s)
Pre-pause time
Fig.7.22
Should one use simultaneously the function "auxiliary pumps", the start even of just one of these pumps excludes obviously the possibility to
pause the main pump.
Functions of “management of 4-20ma signal loss”

The two following functions allow to control the signals of “4-20mA” type that are brought to one of the two inputs of the inverter (terminals 14-
15- or 16-17), to be used as speed reference of the motor or as feed-back of the PID regulator. In case of signal loss, for example due to an
interruption of the wires, the management of the inverter allows to diagnose the malfunctioning assuring in any case the continuity of the plant
operation.
Management of 4-20mA reference loss

The function is enabled by parameter Fn1.05 set on 1 and is active only on the first selector of the speed references rEF.05 (mux1).
The function allows, in case of loss of the reference signal of “4-20mA” type (remote operation), to pass automatically to the reference from
motor potentiometer (LOCAL operation mode), updated to the last valid value of the reference in current. It is possible to signal the reference
loss using a configured digital output (dot.xx=11).
The function requires obviously to start the motor potentiometer (FLo.01=1), with which it is then possible to manage locally the reference, see
chap.3.2.20 .
To have continuity between the reference in current and that from motor potentiometer it is important that the latter has the same limits of
frequency of the analog used as reference (therefore Fn1.02=rEF.01 and Fn1.03=rEF.02 if one uses the first analog, or Fn1.02=rEF.03 and
Fn1.03=rEF.04 if one uses the second one).
using the reset push-button (programmed terminal), it is possible to re-enable the operation with remote reference once that the reference has
returned above the minimum value (3.2mA).
Management of 4-20mA feedback loss

This function (enabled by setting Ain.14=1) performs the control on the feedback of the PID regulator of the inverter, if a signal of the “4-
20mA” type is used. In this case, the eventual loss of the signal disables automatically the PID, avoiding the saturation of it and the “racing” of
the pump to maximum speed. The motor reaches the speed set by the fixed term that is usually summed to the term generated by the
regulator (see for example the fig.2). This anomaly can be signaled by means of a configured digital output (dot.xx=11).
The restoration of the normal operation once that the feedback signal has been restored, occurs by pressing the push-button of reset
protections.
Mot.19
rEF.05=3 Fixed term

+ Frequency reference
rEF.07
+ Mot.20
P.I.D. term enabling
SetPoint
+
Fn6.10
Feedback (4-20mA)
Figure 7.23
N.B.: The described functions are enabled both on the first (terminals 14-15) and on the second analog input (terminal 16), if these are
configured as inputs of 4-20mA type, by setting respectively Ain.13 or Ain.14 on value 3.
Monitor variables
The displays in Mon.13 and Mon.14 (if diA.01=03 and diA.02=4) are respectively the reference (set-point) and the plant pressure directly in
engineering units by the conversion parameter Fn6.16. To obtain the correct reading, it is necessary to set in Fn6.16 the value in Bar (or other
unit) that corresponds to the 20mA of the used transducer.
Parameter Mon.18 usually displays the last tripped alarm, but by holding pressed the key DW, it is possible to scroll the list of the last 10
protections occurred. At tenth alarm the scrolling blocks. On parameter Mon.19 it is active the operation hour counter. By pressing the key DW
or the key UP of the inverter it is possible to display the minutes.
Output of acquired run

It is possible to configure a digital output with the meaning of acquired run. The output becomes active when just one of the two commands of
RUN (terminals 5 or 6) is closed. The output is programmed by setting the related configuration parameter on 13 (dot.xx=13).
Example of application and calibrations

Here below there is an example of application for the regulation of the pressure of a water system. It exploits the internal PID regulator of the
inverter (for the parameters of the PID refer to the family Fn6.xx).
Control GT1000
Mon.1
rEF.0
rEF 05=
Mot.19 ~
rEF 06= Fixed term +
rEF.0
F. rif.
~
rEF.1 + Mot.20
Digital
outputs
Set-point +
Fn6.1
- M1 M2 M3
3~ 3~ 3~
Feedback Analog input 4÷20m From pressare

A transducer
Fn6.1 x Fn6.1 x
Mon.1 Mon.1
Figura 7.24
The PID regulates the speed of the motor M1 in order to keep the pressure set within the set-point (Fn6.10). A component of frequency comes
from the fixed term set in rEF.07, rEF.08 or rEF.10 (according to the number of auxiliary pumps enabled in that moment) allows to let the
regulator work on a shorter range of frequencies. The system pressure measurement occurs by means of the 4÷20mA transducer: this signal
is brought to one of the analog inputs of the inverter, previously configured as PID feedback input.
Main pump data: the only data to be set concerning the motor of the main pump are the rated motor current (Mot.01) and the cosϕ (Mot.07).
Display in Bar: it is possible to read directly the transduced signal in Bar displaying it on parameter Mon.14: this can be obtained by setting in
Fn6.16 the value in Bar of the pressure corresponding to 20mA (Pmax) for the type of transducer used.
Set-point: the setting of the set-point (Fn6.10) is calculated from the pressure (P) that one whishes to have within the plant, and according to
the type of transducer used (Pmin/Pmax), in compliance with the following formula:
 P − P min  Pmin=pressure at 4mA, Pmax=pressure at 20mA
Fn 6.10 = 200.0 ⋅  
 P max − P min 
In Mon.13 (with diA.01=3) there is directly the reference displayed in Bar.

Auxiliary pumps: in case of a single auxiliary pump, at its enabling occurs the automatic switching of the fixed term of frequency from rEF.07
to rEF.08, and the return to rEF.07 at its disabling. In this way, it is possible to avoid that in the pump enabling phase (which has to be set at
50Hz) occurs a sudden increase of pressure in the plant, and vice versa an excessive decrease at its disabling. The value to be set has to be
calibrated trying to avoid this phenomenon. The same behavior occurs with two auxiliary pumps: in this case, at enabling of the second pump
the system switches automatically from term rEF.08 to the one set in rEF.10.
Calibration of motor pause: to establish at which water flow rate it is necessary to pause the motor it is sufficient to bring the system to that
flow condition and to reach parameter Mon.13 to read the value of active current (%) that has to be set for such flow rate. This value has to be
set in parameter PMP.06 and eventually corrected slightly to obtain the disabling at the wished conditions. The parameter PMP.08 sets for
how long the pump must remain in the condition of reduced flow before being disabled.
7.9 Description of the protections / removal of the causes
The tripping of any of the protections disables the inverter, causes the de-energization of the relay «DRIVE OK» (except the OFF one) and is
signaled by a mnemonic code on the keypad display. If the keypad is not installed, the codification of the protections can be in any case
enabled by means of the 3 LEDs (Green/Red/yellow) on the control board: the codification is given in table 7.9.1.
DISPLAY PROTECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION ACTION/CAUSE

--Et EXTERNAL PROTECTION The contact NO (din03÷05=9) or NC (din 03÷05=8) Verify the device that manages the protection, the
connected to the digital input configured for this connections to the dedicated terminal of the GT1000, the
function ha changed status. integrity of the input of the control board.
-t-SL AUXILIARY PROTECTIONS Protection from serial connection. External noises, defective connection cable, faulty
FROM SERIAL PROFIBUS board
--cL 4÷20Ma SIGNAL LOSS The signal of reference of the input 14-15 or 16-17
Check the device that generates the signal and that the
has fallen to a value lower than 3mA. connections are not interrupted.
--th MOTOR THERMAL The limit of overload of programmed current has
Check that the parameters Mot.01÷Mot.07 respect the
PROTECTION been exceeded (rEc.03). rating data of the motor. Verify the scaling of the inverter,
OR eventually remove the overload cause. Check the
INVERTER THERMAL integrity of the encoder (FO control).
PROTECTION V/F characteristic not set in the right way.
Boost too high (Vvf.06).
Parameter rEc.03 badly adjusted.
--OH INVERTER The temperature on the inverter dissipator has - The fans of the inverter or of the panel are failed,
OVERTEMPERATURE exceeded the foreseen limit causing the tripping of blocked or not fed.
the thermal probe. - The ventilation channels are obstructed.
- The environment temperature is too high (panel
ventilation system insufficient).
- Thermal probe wiring interrupted.
--OC OVERCURRENT The level of maximum output current has been The motor phases are short-circuited among each other
exceeded or toward ground.
The acceleration ramps are too short.
The insulation of the motor is insufficient.
The type of motor connection cable is not suitable or the
length of the motor cables is excessive.
In FOC control, faulty encoder or badly assembled.
-dOC OVERCURRENT on D.C. The current on the DC BUS has exceeds the Disconnect voltage, remove the motor cables on the
Bus maximum allowed value. drive side according to the specifications of chap.4.1,
and connect voltage again.
- If the protection remains, probably there is a fault of the
IGBT and/or of the piloting board or of the control board.
- If the protection disappears, verify the motor and its
connection cables.
--OU OVERVOLTAGE The maximum voltage threshold on the DC bus - The deceleration ramp is too short and the parameter
has been exceeded (820 / 909Vdc). rLo.14=1.
- the coast of the load requires the switch and the
resistor of braking.
- The fuse of the braking switch is blown.
- The braking resistor is broken or disconnected.
- The motor is dragged.
--OUS MAINS OVERVOLTAGE The maximum continuous voltage threshold on the The input voltage is higher than the maximum allowed
DC bus has been exceeded with not running value, calculated according to drv.05.
inverter.
--UU UNDERVOLTAGE The voltage on the DC bus is lower than the - Check the supply voltage on the inverter input
minimum allowed value (400Vdc). terminals.
- Verify the integrity of the diodes of the input bridge of
the GT1000 (a.c. power supply)
--UUS UNDERVOLTAGE The pre-charge contactor does not close. Verify the fuses and the transformer foreseen for the
feed of the bobbin, the position of the bridge of voltage
switching.
O-SP OVERSPEED The motor has exceeded of the 20% the limits set Check the parameter Mot.04 (rated motor speed).
on Mot.19 and/or Mot.20. Verify the reply of the speed ring. Too rapid reply
(overshoot).
ErFn CONFIGURATION ERROR Setting of parameters Correct the settings.
OF MOTOR PARAMETERS Mot.01÷Mot.07 not congruent. Switch off and restart the inverter (see REMARK 1
paragraph 7.8.3).
DISPLAY PROTECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION ACTION/CAUSE

-Hard MALFUNCTION OF The inverter checks at each start the offset of Switch off and restart the inverter. If the protection remains,
CURRENT the current transducers. When a given value there is probably a fault of the current sensors or of their
TRANSDUCERS is exceeded, the protection Hard is signaled. connection. In any case, the protection can be always reset
by means of the reset push-button.
E-bnc WHITE EEPROM The U28 memory has not yet been initialized Refer to the Assistance.
MEMORY
OFF PHASE LACK The protection trips when there is a lack even Verify the presence of all three feeding phases. If the feeder
of only one of feeding phases (it can be switching is still in regulation phase the causes of "OFF" is
excluded in the inverter supplied in DC BUS removed, the inverter restarts to work. During the status of
using the logic rLo.08). "OFF" the output commands cannot work, while the
programming parameters can be modified and are stored in
EEPROM.
-PTC- MOTOR THERMAL By means of the thermal probe it is been Check whether the parameters Mot.01÷Mot.07 respect the
PROTECTION BY detected a too high motor temperature. motor rating data. Verify the inverter scaling, eventually,
MEANS OF PTC/NTC remove the overload cause. Check the integrity of the
encoder (FO control).
V/F characteristic not right.
Boost too high (Vvf.06).
Calibration threshold Ain.19 wrong (chapter 7.8.28).
-Enc ENCODER If the output frequency and the number of The encoder is not installed properly (protection meaningful
INSTALLATION revolutions do not match in terms of sign for only during commissioning). See the description of the
ERROR (only FO) more than a second the protection trips. parameter rLo.16 and the chapter 6.3.3 related to the
encoder check.
ENCODER TEAR If the difference between the acting See the description of the parameter rLo.15.
(only FO) revolutions reference and the actual
revolutions of the motor exceeds a threshold
for a second the protection trips.
-ErPF BOARD PROFIBUS With the communication protocol PROFIBUS Verify the presence and the right assembly of the board
PROTECTION enabled, the board SUPRB seem not to be PROFIBUS
connected.
-EEPR EPROM / EEPROM The message appears after the replacement, It is necessary to customize again the EEPROM acting as
INCOMPATIBILITY on an operating GT1000, of the flash EPROM follows:
(U26 integrated) with another one having a - before replacing the flash memory, store on sheet the
different software version. value of the modified parameters with reference to the
default ones;
- set rLo.01=1 and then rLo.06=dEF then reset or switch off
and restart the inverter (the default parameters are
entered);
- enter the parameters previously stored on the sheet.
- Customize the parameters of eventually new functions
used.
See final remark.
If the software has been updated with a following version to the one previously used, and if this release foresees only one or few parameters
not existing in the previous version, it is possible to easily eliminate the incompatibility signaled by “EEpr” without loosing all settings or
without need to note them and then re-enter them. Proceed as follows.
When the message “EEpr” is displayed, press the key “DOWN”. The display shows A number (for ex. 280). It corresponds to the serial
address of the parameter that seems to have a value incompatible with the new release. By referring to the tables of parameters of this
chapter identify the above-mentioned parameter, in the example drv.08.
At this point, always in “EEpr” tripping condition, access to parameter drv.08 and display the value as usual. This operation determines the
storage of the default value of this parameter. At this point, reset the inverter (or switch off and restart it). If drv.08 was the only incompatible
parameter, the message “rdy” is displayed, if instead it was not the only one, there is another “EEpr”. Then, by pressing DOWN one reads a
new address, detects the parameter and proceeds as explained before.
Table 7.9.1 Codification of the protections on the 3 LEDs of the control board
Protection -dOC --OC --OU --OH --UU --UUS -HArd -t-SL -ErPF --tH
Green LED z { z { Ñ{Ò { Ñ{Ò z { z
Red LED z z z z z z z Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò
Yellow LED z z { { { Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò z z {
Protection --cL -ErFn -Enc- --OUS -I-PF --Et -Ptc- -O-SP -EEPr
Green LED Ñ{Ò { z Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò { { { {
Red LED Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò
Yellow LED { Ñ{Ò Ñ{Ò z Ñ{Ò { { { {
LED Codification: {= switched off LED, Ñ{Ò= blinking LED, z= switched on LED
7.10 Remarks concerning the reserved parameters
Unlock mechanism:
Set rLo.01 on 1, set rLo.06 on dEF, set rLo.01 on 0.
The parameters can now be modified as usual.
Parameter:
rEL.02 = KI_ID = correction element KID range of values = -10 ÷ +10 adjusts the flow ring
rEL.04 = KI_IQ = correction element KIQ range of values = -20 ÷ +20 adjusts the torque ring
It is suggested a value of -5, -10 respectively, with 6-poles motors to correct eventual oscillations of flow and/or of torque.
Remarks:
The data entered in rEL.02 and rEL.04 are summed to the pre-existing parameters.
Example: rEL.02=3, rEL.04=-4
Results: KID = 10 + 3 = 13 and KIQ = 20 - 4 = 16
Parameters: rLo.03, rLo.04, rLo.05.
bit Set on value 0 Set on value 1

rLo.03 Enables the KDS KDS excluded, fixed value 128
rLo.04 WST calculated from IQ WST calculated from IQK
rLo.05 weak filter on IMQ weak filter excluded
Before switching off the inverter, remember to set again rLo.01 = 1 and rLo.06 = Curr, otherwise the default
WARNING values will be restored and the settings of the motor parameters and of the parameters set by the user
would get lost.
Remark on rLo.03-4 :
- rLo.03 = 1 (KDS=128): the flow current is adjusted according to the following diagram:
Flow current
reference ID
100%
(IDN)
Motor
RPMN 2 3 revol.
(Mot.04)
- rLo.03= 0: the flow current is always adjusted as in figure, but the algorithm tries to compensate the effects of the non-linearity of the
magnetic characteristic reducing the flow current even further.
- rLo.04= 1: set on 1, it has a stabilizing effect on the system, especially when one works with rated torque and rated revolutions, and
the rated voltage of the motor is the same of the mains. In the operation in “speed”, this bit can be in any case set on 1.
8 SERIAL INTERFACE ANSI-X3.28-2.5-A4
8.1 Introduction
The serial interface allows the connection of the inverter to an external device for the control and the monitoring of the system. It is forecast the
protocol of communication ANSI-x3.28-2.5-A4 for a connection multidrop.
The industrial standard RS485 imposes the logic described in the following figure (Fig. 8-1):
The GT1000 is suitable also for the data interchange with a personal computer through RS232 and through the phone connector X3 (chap.8.8).
Logic SPACE 0 (ON)

3V
Figure 8.1
8.2 Serial interface RS485
The serial interface RS485 foresees a connection by 2 wires and allows to communicate on a single line with various devices (maximum 32). This
type of interface, forecasting a differential input, is more immune to the interferences of systems type RS232, can tolerate greater levels of voltage
in a common way and allows to operate on long distances up to 1200 meters.
8.3 The protocol ANSI-x3.28-2.5-A4
This protocol defines the format of the character, the syntax of the commands and the sequence of the characters to be sent to the units.
A character is made of 10 bit: the first bit is called "start bit" and is at logic level 0, then it is transmitted the data (a character ASCII of 7 bit),
the eventual bit of parity and the "stop bit". If the parity is set "PAIR" it is transmitted a logic level 1 of parity (bit 9) when the data is made of a
number odd of logic impulses so that the data + the bit of parity give a pair number pair of logic levels 1. If the parity is set "NONE" it is not
calculated the bit of parity but are in any case sent 10 bit per character. The final bit is the "STOP BIT" and is a logic level 1. The speed by
which are transmitted the characters is called BAUD RATE and defines the number of bits transmitted per second. This parameter (19) can
vary from 600 to 9600. The baud rate of the inverter must be the same as the baud rate of the computer.
There are two types of commands:
• the command READ to read parameters of the inverter (figure 8-2).
• the command WRITE to write the parameters which can be modified (figure 8-3).
8.4 Setting the parameters for the communication
Before any communication you must set on the inverters the following parameters.
S-L.01: Choice of protocol. S-L.01=1 ANSI-X3.28-2.5-A4.
S-L.02: Serial communication enabled. S-L.02 = 1 disabled.
S-L.04: =0
S-L.05: = 1 (RS485HD)
S-L.10: BCC Determines if calculate or not the checksum of the block of data. S-L.10 = 1 disabled.
S-L.11: Parity Determines the transmission or not of the bit of parity. S-L.11 = 1 disabled.
Serial Baud Rate.
S-L.12: This parameter sets the baud rate of communication; you can select the following values: 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600. Such
values become active only after the switching OFF and restart of the drive.
Station address.
Must be included between 0 and 32. When it is placed at 0 and the host commands a writing to the device 0, we do not have, from
S-L.13:
the inverters concerned, any response. The command of writing is, however deceived by them and performed; this allows the
simultaneous programming of more stations.
IMGT10002EN - September 06 115

Serial Interface ANSI GT1000
8.5 The READ command
The command "READ" is made of at the maximum of 9 characters. The format of the message is the following:
Initialization of the communication: 1 character EOT (04H)
"EOT" is a special character ASCII known as character of control; like other characters of control it is made of 7 bits. When this character is sent,
al devices connected to the serial line are initialized.
Station address: 4 characters ADD
The address of the device identified which device connected to the serial line must communicate with the host. The address can vary from 0 or 32
and is set by the parameter S-L.13. For the integrity of the data the digits are sent 2 times: (example, if the address of station is 09 it is sent 0099).
Number of the parameter: 3 characters max. DP
Indicates the parameter which must be read; consist of a number maximum of 3 characters. For example for the parameter rEF.07 send 24 or 024.
End of the message: 1 character ENQ (05H)
It highlights the end of the message. The format of the message sent by host is therefore: EOT ADD DP ENQ
WARNING The drive has a timeout i.e. after a certain period to be quantified in less than 100ms. considers the
message ended.
The inverter responds as follows:

START of the message: 1 character STX (02H)
"STX" is a character of control ASCII; it informs the host of the response start.
Number of parameter: 3 characters max. DP See previous description.
The value of the parameter: 6 characters max. DATA
This is the value of the parameter required. The first character is the sign of the data; if such information has no importance, as in the transmission
of a logic parameter, the first character is a null space. This character determines the end of the number of the parameter. The remaining
characters, 5 at maximum, consist of 4 digits and of a decimal point if necessary.
End of the data required: 1 character ETX (03H)
It is a character of control ASCII which informs the host that the data has ended.
Checksum of the unlock of the data: 1 character z BCC
The final character processed by the inverter allows to the host to verify the eventual presence of errors in the data received. This character is not
transmitted if the parameter S-L.10 (BCC) is set at 1.
If BCC is disabled it is transmitted the code ASCII "CR".
The message sent by the device has the structure: STX DP DATA ETX BCC
The same parameter can be read again simply by sending from the host of the code "NAK". It is also possible to read the previous or following
parameter sending "BS" or ACK".
8.6 The command WRITE
The command "WRITE" is made of at maximum 9 characters. The format of the message is created as follows:
Initialization of the communication: 1 character EOT See previous description.
Address station: 4 characters ADD See previous description.
START of the message: 1 character STX See previous description.
Number of parameter: 3 characters max. DP See previous description.
The value of the parameter: 6 characters max. DATA
This is the value which must be implemented. The first character is the sign of the data; if such information has no importance, as in the
transmission of a logic parameter, the first character can be a space. Such character determines the end of the number of the parameter. The
remaining characters, 5 at maximum, consist of 4 digits and of a decimal point if necessary.
End of the data required: 1 character ETX
Checksum of the block of the data: 1 character BCC
See the previous description; if BCC is disabled to end the message it can be sent any character ASCII.
The message sent to the device has the structure: EOT ADD STX DP DATA ETX BCC
WARNING The inverter has a timeout i.e. after a certain period of less of 100ms. it considers the message finished.
If the parameter number , the data or the BCC contain some errors, it is transmitted by the inverter the character "NAK". If the address station is 0
the data sent is implemented by all the devices interested (S-L.13 = 0); however none of the inverters connected sends the character of recognition
to the host.
The checksum of the data block
The checksum of the block is a single character obtained making the OR exclusive of all the characters received: if the result is a character of
control ASCII you must add the hexadecimal number 20. The variable of start for the calculation of the checksum must have a value 0.
116 IMGT10002EN - September 06

GT1000 Serial Interface ANSI
MESSAGE
START
HOST - VECTOR
EOT ADD DP ENQ
(1) (4) (3) (1)
9 CHARACTERS
DRIVE
RESPONSE
DRIVE - HOST DRIVE - HOST
NO RESP. STX DP EOT

(1) (3) (1)
NO CHARACTER
MESSAGE 5 CHARACTERS
VALID
1. STATION NOT
RECOGNIZED
PARAMETER NOT
DRIVE - HOST RECOGNIZED
2. ERROR PARITY
STX DP DATA ETX BCC
3. COMMUNIC. (1) (3) (6) (1) (1)
INTERRUPTED
12 CHARACTERS
HOST - DRIVE
HOST
RESPONSE ACK o NAK o BS
1 CHARACTER
ACK READS THE

FOLLOWING PARAM
“DP+1”
NAK READS THE SAME
PARAM. “DP”
BS READ THE
PREVIOUS PARAM
“DP-1”
MESSAGE
END
Figure 8-2 Command READ

MESSAGE
START
HOST - DRIVE
EOT ADD
(1) (4)
5 CHARACTERS
HOST - DRIVE
STX DP DATA ETX

(1) (3) (6) (1) (1)
12 CHARACTERS
DRIVE
RESPONSE
DRIVE - HOST DRIVE - HOST DRIVE - HOST
NO RESPONSE NAK ACK

(1) (1)
NO CHARACTER FAST ACCESS
1 CHARACTER 1 CHARACTER
INITIALIZATION AND
ADDRESS OF STATION
ARE NOT
1. STATION NOT 1. MNEMONIC NOT NECESSARY TO
RECOGNIZED VALID CONTINUE THE
THE DATA HAVE COMMUNICATION
2. ERROR PARITY 2. ERROR BCC BEEN RECEIVED
AND STORED
3. COMMUNIC. 3. DATA NOT VALID
INTERRUPTED
MESSAGE
END
Figure 8-3 Command WRITE

GT1000 Serial Interface ANSI
8.7 Use of the serial interface

Through the serial interface RS485HD it can be read the levels (status) of the terminals of command of the inverter and can be transmitted to the
inverter itself of the commands, as bits, which are then combined with the hardware commands. This is possible thanks to two parameters: Mon.16
(Status) and Mon.17 (Command).
Mon.16 (address 195) is a parameter of reading only, i.e. it cannot be modified with is keys UP and DW.
It can assume 2 different meanings according to the value of the parameter S-L.15:
S-L.15=0 (default): Mon.16 is the "mirror" of the status of the inputs of command to the terminals of the drive and must be interpreted as a string of
zeroes and one.
S-L.15=1: Mon.16 is the combination in OR (except for Drive Enable) between the status of the inputs of command to the terminals of the drive
and the word of serial command (Mon.17) and must be interpreted as a string of zeroes and one.
We describe here below the correspondence between the single bits and the terminals of command.
Mon.16 Status FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
bit 0 RUN/FW 1 = terminal 5 closed
bit 1 FLOW/RV 1 = terminal 6 closed
bit 2 n.u. 0
bit 3 n.u. 0
bit 4 COM1 1 = terminal 7 closed
bit 7 Drive Enable 1 = terminal 10 closed on terminal 11
bit 8 STATUS Status of inverter: 1=TRIP 0=NORMAL
bit 9 MAINS CONTROL 1 = mains missing
bit 10 Auxb0 Auxiliary bit 0
bit 12 RESET 1 = reset
bit 13 IGBT-ON IGBT commanded
bit 14 X Reserved to networks of communication
Example: with the parameter S-L.15=0, if the terminals 10, 5 and 6 are closed , in Mon.16 we read the value 131 (=128+2+1).
On the display of the inverter on the parameter RUN/F DRIVE STATUS
Mon.16. the codification is the following:
COM2 FL/RV
COM3
COM1 RIFIN1 RESET
RIFIN2 DRIV.ENABLE
The word of command transmitted through the serial must be written in Mon.17 (address 196).
The writing is made only at level of memory RAM, there is no storage in EEPROM. At the moment of the startup it is automatically set to zero. The
correspondence between the bits of the word transmitted and the commands which it makes operative is described in the following table:
Mon.17 Command FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
bit 0 RUN/ FW 1 = provides the run/FW in OR with the terminal 5
bit 1 FLOW / RV 1= activates the function FLOW/RV in OR with the terminal 6
bit 2 RIFIN1 1 = activates the function programmed(default = RP1)
bit 3 RIFIN2 1 = activates the function programmed(default = RP2)
bit 4 COM1 1 = activates the function programmed(default = CF1)
bit 7 Drive Enable 1 = enables the commands if the terminal 10 is closed on the 11 (S-L.03=0)
bit 8 ---- ----
bit 9 ---- ----
bit 10 ---- ----
bit 11 ---- ----
bit 12 RESET performs the functional reset if permitted
bit 13 ---- ----

Example: it is performed the connection between the terminals 10 and 11 (with S-L.03=0): sending a Command = 161 (A1 according to base
16) it means:
-inverter enabled, run command, active the reference rEF.09.
We underline that: when the inverter is under the control of the serial, S-L02=0, it can receive the commands through the writing of Mon.17
provided that the parameter S-L.03 is equal to 0. In this case the hardware commands which normally it receives from the terminal board remain
in any case activates and combine with those received from the serial.
If for example the terminal 5 (RUN) is closed, the value of the bit 0 of Mon.17 has no influence because it is in OR logic with the one deriving from
the closing of the terminal 5. The command of run forward is recognize as active. In the same way for the other inputs.
THE ONLY EXCEPTION CONCERNS THE ENABLING TERMINAL 10. THE COMMAND OF DRIVE ENABLE IS MANAGED BY KEEPING
PRIORITARY THE HARDWARE INPUT.
*) If the terminal is open the inverter is for sure disabled (rdy).

The command from serial, bit 7 of Mon.17, is not sufficient to enable the device.
**) If the terminal is closed and S-L.03 = 0, it depends upon the serial to confirm or not the enabling of the inverter:
-with a 1 on the bit 7 of Mon.17 it can give the Enable and make operative the commands of run/stop.
-with one 0 can deactivate the device leaving in free revolution the motor.
If S-L.03 = 1 on the contrary, the commands active are only those hardware (terminal board).
The “reference from serial interface" indicated in the blocks diagrams Ser. is addressed on the Mon.09 (address 188). Once you select the value 6
or the parameter rEF.05 or the rEF.06 it is made active with the contacts (or equivalent commands) CF1, CF2 and CF3, you can change the
reference through the serial according to the needs of the work cycle or according to the needs of the control without concerning the non volatile
memory of the inverter. It is clear in fact that through the serial you may also activate for ex.. rEF.01 and you may vary the reference modifying the
value of the rEF.01 itself; this way of operating is allowed but it is in any case unrecommended, because it implies repeated and unuseful writings
on the EEPROM of the control card.
These devices allow only a limited number of operations of writing.
To enable the effective use of the serial interface RS485 HalfDuplex with the protocol ANSI-X3.28-2.5-A4 , available on the terminals 19-20-21
of the control card (XM1) it is necessary to place S-L.04 at 0 e S-L.05 a 1 (besides enabling the serial with S-L.02=0).
The meaning of the terminals is the following:
terminal board XM1 MEANING

XM1-19 0V
XM1-20 +Tx / +Rx
XM1-21 -Tx / -Rx
8.8 Use ANSI-X3.28-2.5-A4 connected to P.C. through RS232

If you have available both jumpers JP4 and JP5 in the positions 1-2, it is available on the phone connector X3 a serial RS232 which can be
connected to a personal computer as in the following table:
Pins of phone connector X3 MEANING Pins connector 9 ways (PC)

2 0V 5
3 Rx 3
8 Tx 2
To this purpose it is available an adapter as shown in figure 8-4.
Figure 8.4
In this way the protocol ANSI-X3.28-2.5-A4 can be used for diagnostics or for the use with the interface P.C..On the parameter Fn7.09 the
macro “Pc232” allows to configure automatically the necessary parameters (see chap. 7.8.25).

APPENDIX A
A1 – DIMENSIONS
S1GT0P3-028 IP20
ON Fault RUN
STOP MAN AUTO RESET
Enter
Canc.
SHIFT
Tipo Type Taglia W H D Peso/Weigth

Frame mm in mm in mm in Kg Lbs
S1GT0P3-6F I 125 4,92 216,5 8,52 171 6,7 3,5 7,7
S1GT008F II 127 5 288 11,33 218,5 8,6 5 11
S1GT011/15F III 127 5 388 15,27 218,5 8,6 7,5 16,5
S1GT018/22F IIIX 127 5 413 16,25 240,5 9,5 7,5 16,5
S1GT028F IIIL 127 5 413 16,25 255 10 10 22
Taglia W1 H1 W2 H2 D1
Tipo Type
Frame mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
S1GT0P3-6F I 131 5,16 271 10,67 106 4,17 246,5 9,70 55 2,16
S1GT008F II 138 5,43 341,5 13,44 98 3,86 310,5 12,22 108,5 4,27
S1GT011/15F III 138 5,43 441,5 17,38 98 3,86 410,5 16,16 108,5 4,27
S1GT018/22F IIIX 138 5,43 466,5 18,36 98 3,86 435,5 17,14 130,5 5,13
S1GT028F IIIL 138 5,43 466,5 18,36 98 3,86 435,5 17,14 145 5,13
IMGT10002EN -November 06 121

Appendix A GT1000
S1GT030-036
Peso/Weigth 32Kg (70.55Lbs)
246 (9.692 in) 279 (10.99 in)
220 (8.668 in)
153,5 (6.04in)
65 [2.559 in]
358 (14.105 in)
454 (17.888 in)
488 (19.227 in)

200 (7.88 in)
S1GT030-036 IP54
Peso/Weigth 32Kg (70.55Lbs)
279 (10.99 in)
246 (9.692 in)
220 (8.668 in) 153,5 (6.04in)
20 (0.787 in)
430 (16.941in)
358 (14.105 in)
455 (17.926 in)
488 (19.227 in)

52 (2.048in)
186 (7.328 in)

200 (7.88 in)
122 IMGT10002EN - November 06

GT1000 Appendix A
S1GT045-150 IP20
IMGT10002EN -November 06 123

Appendix A GT1000
S1GT045-150 IP54
124 IMGT10002EN - November 06

GT1000 Appendix A
IMGT10002EN -September 06 125

Appendix A GT1000
A.2 Wiring diagrams
This section includes the power diagrams of all GT1000. The table indicated here below lists the terminology in use for the wiring diagrams.
The symbols in use to indicate the auxiliary and power terminals:

Power terminals L1 Input phase – MAINS
L2 Input phase – MAINS
L3 Input phase – MAINS
PE Protection ground/Screen protection
U Output phase - U – MOTOR
V Output phase - V – MOTOR
W Output phase - W – MOTOR
RE + Resistance of external braking
RE - Resistance of external braking
+ BUS DC positive
-P BUS DC negative (diodes bridge)
- BUS DC negative (IGBT)
Morsetti power supply ausiliarie L Auxiliaries 230V-50/60 Hz
N Auxiliaries 230V-50/60 Hz
The following table lists all power diagrams enclosed.
SIZE/DIMENSION POWER DIAGRAMS

TAGLIA I S1GT0P3/0P4/0P6F pag. A -5
TAGLIA II, III, IIIX S1GT008/011/015/018/022F pag. A -6
TAGLIA IIIL S1GT028F pag. A -6
TAGLIA IIIN S1GT029/033F/Y pag. A -7
TAGLIA IVN S1GT042/52/62F/Y pag. A -8
TAGLIA VN S1GT076/100F/Y pag. A -9
TAGLIA VIN S1GT121/150/166F/Y pag. A -10
S1GT0P3-0P4-0P6F
+P SIZE I
W
V
U
+P
PE L1 L2 L3 U V W + R -

GT1000 Appendix A
GT1A008-011-015 GT1A018-022
-P + L3 L2 L1 PE -P + L3 L2 L1 PE
U V W U V W
SIZE IIIX
SIZE II/III
U V W + RE- PE U V W PE + RE-
S1GT028F
RE-
+P
PE L1 L2 L3
-
SIZE IIIL
U V W PE
IMGT10002EN 127
Appendix A GT1000
S1GT030-036 S1GT045-053-066
6P & Brake 6P & Brake
Power
Power
supply
supply
DC
DC
Board
Control
Board
Control
S1GT086-108 S1GT125-150
6P & Brake 6P & Brake

Power
supply
Power
supply
DC
Board
Control
Board
Control
AC
230V 50-60Hz

GT1000 Appendix A
IMGT10002EN -September 06 129

Appendix A GT1000

APPENDIX B
F1:ANALOG INPUT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
F1:INGRESSI ANALOGICI
+10V
JP2
IMGT10002EN - September 06
1K
Ain.02
14
5V 2048
+
Ean1 Ean1 [2]
5V +
-10V +10V
15
Ain.01
Figure C.1
Ain.03
16 Ain.05
JP3 5V 2048
+
Ean2 Ean2 [2]
5V +
475 -10V +10V
Ain.04
Ain.06
0V
131
132
F2:ANALOG INPUT CONVERSION PWM OUTPUT
F2:CONVERSIONE INGRESSI ANALOGICI USCITE PWM
Appendix B
rEF.01
Ain.13 Aot.01
N 1
* FOUT 2
Ean1
[1] RIF1 [5] I OUT 3
2048 1
Th% 4 +
TAB Aot.01
VC 5
Aot.02
rEF.02 N0 6
N40 7
PWM0 0/ +10V
Tqo 8 Electric 18
config.
Tq 9
2 10
1000 + P
K [9] Aot.03
3
AUX1 11
[9] [4] -
K+,K TAB Aot.04 Aot.08
4 12
[4] AUX2
0 2048 Ki [9]
5 Mp 13
K% [5]
6
Aot.07
16
rEF.03
Figure C.2
Ain.14 Aot.04 19
N 1
* FOUT 2
Ean2
[1] RIF2 [5] I OUT 3
2048 1
Th% 4 + SCHEDA ESPANSIONE
TAB Aot.04
VC 5
Aot.05
rEF.04 N0 6
N40 7
PWM1 -10 /+ 10V
Tqo 8 Electric 11 -EXP
config.
Tq 9
2 10
1000 - P
K [9] Aot.06 12 -EXP
3
[4]
AUX1 11
[9] -
K+,K TAB Aot.04 Aot.09
4 AUX2 12
Ki [9] [4]
0 2048
5 Mp 13
K% [5]
6
Aot.07
16
GT1000
F3: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
F3: INGRESSI-USCITE DIGITALI
GT1000
din.01
dot.01
0 CF1 R1 1
5 FW/ST [4]
1 CF2 R2 2
[4]
R3 3
2 CF3 [4] 3
6 RV/FI
3 RP1 R4 4
[4]
4
4 RP2 5 RL2
5 RP3 6
RIFIN1
6 UP(Mp) [4] Auxb0 7
bit2-Command Word
7 DW(Mp) [4] Auxb1 8
RIFIN2
8 ET-NC
bit3-CommandWord dot.02
9 ET-NO
R1 1
[4]
7 COM1 R2 2
[4] 7
din.02
[4] R3 3
0 CF1 R4 4
[4] 8
Figure C.3
8 COM2
1 CF2 RL3
5
6
din.03
9 COM3 [4] Auxb0 7
0 CF1
[4] Auxb1 8
1 CF2
10 DREN dot.03
R1 1
din.04 [4]
R2 2
[4] 9
0 CF1
[4] R3 3
1 CF2
11
R4 4 10
[4]
RL4
5
+24Vcc din.05
6
12 0 CF1
[4] Auxb0 7
*
1 CF2
[4] Auxb1 8 SCHEDA ESPANSIONE
Appendix B
133
F4: DIAGNOSTIC - SPEED-FREQUENCY RELAYS
134
diA.01 diA.03
F4: DIAGNOSTICA - RELE' DI VELOCITA'-FREQUENZA
Ean1 1 R1 1
[1] [4] [3]
Appendix B
Ean2 2 R2 2
[1] [4]
n.c. 3 R3 3
[1] [4]
R1
n.c. 4 R4 4
[1] [4]
N-No 5 5 1
N/Fout
Idm/Irea 6 6
Iqm/Iatt AUX1 AUXb0 N

7 7
[2] [3]
Tqo rEF.17 [3]
[8] 8 8
Tq 9 9
P 10 10 R2
Dia.05 13
1
N/Fout
Gradi 16 16
N
[3]
diA.04 rEF.18
diA.02
Figure C.4
Ean1 1 R1 1
[1] [4] R3
Ean2 2 R2 2
[1] [4] 1
n.c. 3 R3 3
[1] [4]
n.c. 4 R4 4
[1] [4]
N-No 5 5 [3]
rEF.19
Idm/Irea 6 6
Iqm/Iatt 7 AUX2 7 AUXb1

R4
[2] [3]
Tqo 8 8
[8] 1
Tq 9 9 N 40 /Frif
P 10 10 -
Dia.06 13 N/Fout rEF.20
Gradi 16 16
GT1000
rEF.05 F5:REFERENCE
GT1000
RIF1 1 F5:RIFERIMENTI
[2]
[2] RIF2 2
rEF.07 3
Mux1
rEF.08 4
(*)da FW/RV 5 CF1 [3]
Ser 6
Freq 7
Mux2
(**)Mp 8
CF2 [3]
rEF.09
rEF.06 CF1 [3]

Mot.19
RIF1 1
[2]
RIF2 2 rEF.10
[2]
rEF.07 3
CF3 [3] + Mon.08 RPM (FOC) [7]
rEF.08 4
(*)da FW/RV 5 + Hz (V/F) [6]
rEF.11
Ser 6
Figure C.5
Freq 7 X
CF1 [3]
Mot.20
(**)Mp 8
rEF.12
CF2 [3]
rEF.15
1 2 3 4
Mux1 Mux2 Ser PID

rEF.13
CF1 [3] rEF.16 (%)

*)FW/RV Taken by reference sign
*)FW/RV ricavati da segno riferimento
rEF.14
**)MP=Motor potentiometer
**)MP=motopotenziometro
K% (DEFAULT 100)
[2]
Appendix B
135
136
F6: RAMPS LIMITATIONS, V/F (v/Hz) CURVE
F6: RAMPE LIMITAZIONI, CARATTERISTICA V/F (v/Hz)
Appendix B
tu
+
V* V
V
tv +
f
tw Fb
Phase
Fase
RAMPS ROUNDING
ARROTONDAMENTO RAMPE VOLTAGE
COMPENSATION
COMPENSAZIONE
TENSIONE
rPS.17
BOOSTER
Figure C.6
iu
iv
Freq. Mon.08 + Mon.07 + Mon.04
[5] iw
+ -
ACTIVE RAMPS SELECTION reactive

SLIP SELEZIONE RAMPE ATTIVE reattiva 2
COMPENSATION iu
COMPENSAZIONE LIMITATIONS iv
SCORRIMENTO
LIMITAZIONI active iw
Fw Rw RP1
attiva 3
RP2
RP3
Phase
Fase
Mon.04
active active
attiva rPS.01 rPS.09
rPS.08 rPS.16 attiva
Mon.03
f
GT1000
F7: RAMPS,VECTOR CONTROL (F.O.C.)
F7: RAMPE,CONTROLLO VETTORIALE (F.O.C.)
GT1000
q tu
RAMPS ROUNDING
ARROTONDAMENTO RAMPE
tv
Ø* rPS.17
tw
Phase Ø
Fase
Giri/round Mon.08 Mon.07 Mon.07

[5] [8]
ACTIVE RAMPS SELECTION

SELEZIONE RAMPE ATTIVE
iu
Figure C.7
iv
Mon.04
RP1 iw
RP2
RP3
reactive
reattiva 2
iu
iv
rPS.01 rPS.09
rPS.08 rPS.16 active iw
attiva
3
Fase
Wst
+ Mon.03
from encoder f
dall'encoder +
Appendix B
137
138
F8: SPEED REGULATOR AND TORQUE REFERENCE
F8: REGOLATORE DI VELOCITA' E RIF. DI COPPIA
FROM CONFIGURATION
Appendix B
Sid.04=0 PARAMETERS
DA PARAMETRI DI
CONFIGURAZIONE
+
CI C
FROM MAIN P
-1
Z
CNI
+ +
N0 Tpa Torque term I from PID
[7] Mon.07 X
+ Termine di coppia I dal PID C
-
N
P
+
Tp Torque term from PID rEc.08=1 Tqo (torque request)
X
Mon.02 + Termine di coppia dal PID Tqo (richiesta di coppia)
+
+ Mon.10
D +
rEc.08=1 CN CN FROM CONFIGURATION
Sid.05=0 PARAMETERS
-1 (ADD_TP) DA PARAMETRI DI
Z X CONFIGURAZIONE
- -
+ C FROM MAIN P
DA RETE P
Tqo
Figure C.8
2 3 4 5 6
rEc.10
SCHEDA ESPANSIONE
Tser RIF1 RIF2 Tint from tecnologic function

[2] [2] [9] da Funzione Tecnologica
rEc.08
rEv.01
Sid.09=0
Tser 2
RIF1 3 rEv.05 N>rEv.04
[2] I
I FROM MAIN P
T Torque reference rEv.02
RIF2 4 I DA RETE P
[2]
Tint 5 T Rif. di coppia Sid.08=0
[9]
from Tecnologic function rEv.06 N>rEv.04
6 P
da Funzione Tecnologica rEv.03 I FROM MAIN P
I DA RETE P
Sid.10=0
rEv.07 N>rEv.04 D
I FROM MAIN P
I DA RETE P
GT1000
F9: COUPLE LIMITS
GT1000
F9: LIMITI DI COPPIA

rEc.01
K+
[2]
N C,CI
[8]
rEc.
09=2
,rEc
.09=
4
Figure C.9
Mot.04(Mot.15)
9=4
rEc.0
9=3,
rEc.0
N CN,CNI
[8]
K- Ki
[2] [2]
Tint [8]
X X
rEc.02 rEc.11
Appendix B
139
Appendix B GT1000

APPENDIX C PC_TOOL
1 Introduction
The software of diagnostic interface allows to connect to a personal computer an inverter of the series GT1000, but also to inverters of the
previous series SVTS-B or SVTSplus-B.
The program consists in a Windows application and requires as operative system Microsoft Windows 98, Windows NT, or Windows 2000.
In this release, the following procedures are possible:
- Automatic acknowledgement of the type of inverter, of the software release and of the number of the drive station (S-L.13).
- Backup of the drive parameters and storage in a file in text format (upload).
- Display of all parameters with possibility to modify them online.
- Possibility to display and modify the parameters of a backup file.
- Possibility to store the same file with another name.
- Possibility to download a file of parameters on the drive (download).
- Possibility to print the parameters.
- Online help.
When it is connected to the inverter and the upload of the parameters is enabled, the program creates automatically the backup file with the
following denomination:
- ‘parsvs.xxx’, where ‘xxx’ indicates the number of the connected drive. For example: parsvs.009 is the backup file of the drive with
serial address S-L.13 equal to 9.
2 Installation
To install it, just double click on the file setup.exe. An automatic procedure will guide the user through the installation of the program. This
procedure creates within the directory “programs” a directory called “Elco” that contains various configuration files together with the executable
file.
The configuration files are text files containing information concerning the parameters of the inverter (serial address, minimum value,
maximum value, default value, etc.) for a given software version of the drive.
The configuration files have the following name:
- ‘svs5xx’, for the files concerning the inverter of the series GT1000 where ‘xx’ are two digits identifying the software release of the eprom
mounted on the inverter.
When the connection is performed, the program recognizes automatically the type of inverter and connects using the related configuration file.
3 Connection
The connection between PC and inverter occurs through a cable as the one shown in the figure here below (only the pins 2, 3 and 5 have to
be connected).
Fig. 3.1
The cable must then be inserted from the inverter side into the telephone
connector X3 of the control card using the proper adapter shown in figure (code
1000007127):
On the same card, also the 2 jumpers JP4 and JP5 have to be configured in the
positions 1-2 as shown in the topographic diagram given here below (the square
U26
space identifies pin 1). U16
JP5
JP4
U28
X3
JP6
KE1 JP2
E JP9
JP3
XM1

Appendix C GT1000
3.1 Serial configuration
To obtain the connection between PC and inverter, it is necessary to configure the serial communication RS232 with protocol ANSI-X3.28 and
output on the telephone connector X3 (K3 for the series SVTS or SVTSplus).
It is possible to set automatically the serial connection : with terminal 10 open (DREN) one goes to parameter Fn7.09 until the message
“Pc232“ is displayed.
Once this setting has been confirmed, or by pressing the “right arrow” key, or by automatic return to “rdy ”, a proper routine performs the
necessary programming and the automatic reset.
If performed manually, the configuration of the serial connection requires the setting of the parameters of the family “S-L” as shown in table
3.1. After having set these parameters, switch off and than on again the inverter or perform the software reset procedure.
Parameters S-L
Parameter Value
S-L.01 1
Serial enabling S-L.02 0
S-L.04 0
S-L.05 0
S-L.10 1
S-L.11 1
S-L.12 9600
Drive address S-L.13 ≠0
Table 3.1.
At the end of the connection via PC, to disable the serial connection, just set the parameter S-L.02 on 1 and reset the drive.
4 Modes of use of the program
The start screen with which the program starts is the following:
Serial initial. key (TTY)

File opening key
Fig. 4.1
From this screen, it is possible to select 2 main operation modes:
1) Online operation, i.e. direct connection via serial card with an inverter
2) Off-line operation, i.e. opening of an already existing parameter file
4.1 Online operation

The key TTY allows to initialize the serial communication establishing the address of the drive (parameter S-L.13) and the output port used by
the PC (COM1 or COM2). Once the port has been initialized, press the key with the telephone icon that recognizes the software release, loads
the related configuration file and enables the connection with the inverter. At this point, the screen shown is the following one (Fig. 4.1.1).
Upload key Connection enabling key
Software release Drive address Configuration file
Fig. 4.1.1
The key with the icon “PC and up arrow” enables the upload of the inverter parameters that are consequently stored into a file called
‘parsvs.xxx’, where ‘xxx’ indicates the serial address of the connected drive.
At the end of the upload process, the key with the ‘P’ is enabled (figure 4.1.2). Using this key, it is possible to have the opportunity to
communicate directly with the drive using tables concerning families of parameters. It is possible to display the drive parameters, as well as to
modify and eventually store them on the same file or on another file (key with the disk icon).

GT1000 Appendix C
Storage key ‘P’ key ‘Stop’ key
Fig. 4.1.2
The “Stop” key in this situation, makes impossible the modification of the parameters of the connected inverter offering the possibility to create
a new parameter file starting from the one of the drive itself.
Going back to the screen shown in Fig. 4.1.1, if one presses the key for file opening, an already existing parameter file opens. In this case, the
following screen is displayed (Fig. 4.1.3) with also the Download key enabled. By pressing it, the just opened parameter file is downloaded on
the connected drive. This allows for example to program in short time more inverters configured in the same way.
Download key
Fig. 4.1.3
4.2 Off-line operation
From the start screen (Fig.4.1), by pressing immediately the key for file opening, it is possible to access the off-line operation mode, i.e.
without need to get in connection with the inverter, it is possible to display the parameters concerning a backup file of a given drive, which had
been created previously.
Before being able to open the parameter file, the program requires to select the configuration file (Fig. 4.2.1).
The configuration files are text files containing

information concerning the parameters of the inverter
(serial address, minimum value, maximum value,
default value, etc.) for a given software version of the
drive. The configuration file are contained in the
directory “data” within the directory “Elco”.
At this point, the same procedures used to change the

parameters ‘online’ do apply, the only exception is
that the parameters concern a file. At the end of the
modifications, it is then possible to return to the
‘online’ mode and therefore to download on an
inverter the just created parameter file.
Fig. 4.2.1

Appendix C GT1000
4.3 Parameters
The presentation of the parameters (P key) occurs

through a main table grouping the drive parameters in
3 families. It is possible to access the desired
parameter group by highlighting the box and pressing
twice the left key of the mouse.
In the table concerning each group, it appears (from
left to right) the serial address of the parameter, its
name, its current value, the minimum, maximum and
default values.
The boxes displaying the current value have a
green background, if the parameter has a value
differing from the default one (Fig. 4.3.1).
Fig. 4.3.1
For some parameters, the selection of the value occurs among a given number of fixed possibilities (selectors). In this case, the selection is
enabled using the push-button highlighted in the following figure.
4.4 Parameter print
It is possible to print the parameters using the key ‘Print’.

To do this, it is first of all necessary to select at least one
of the 3 families of parameters. To select a family, press
with the mouse on the keys with the names of the
parameter families.
By selecting all 3 families, all the drive parameters are
printed.
Fig. 4.4

APPENDIX D OZONIZER
1 INTRODUCTION
The ozonizer is a device for the industrial production of the ozone (O3). The device includes a bulb in wich the oxygen is injected (O2), then the
bulb is subjected, by an electric apparatus, to electrical fields with high frequency and high voltage. The applied electrical field brings to the ozone
formation.
The frequency converter is used to generate an output voltage with frequency (500-1000Hz) and wide separately controlled.
At the output terminal is connected a special step-up transformer. The secondary of the transformer is connected to the bulb electrode..
Mains
O2
~
Inverter
Bulb
~
Transformer
O3
Figure 1. – “Ozonizer” principle diagram
Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali has designed a particular firmware for this application
Version SW: 1Goz06B1

Date: 01/10/06
Note: Changes with reference to the previous version 1Goz04B1
1. The output voltage is completely independent of the frequency, (in the previous version the output voltage was dependent of
the frequency through the parameter. Vvf.02=500. Now the parameter Vvf.02 is completely not influent. The set output
voltage (through the analogy input or the parameter Vvf.01) will be constant over the complete range of the output frequency
(500-1000Hz).
2. The resolution of output voltage modulation has been increased, so it is possible a thinner setting either through the analog
input 2 (terminals 16-17), or through the parameter Vvf.01 (the parameter has now the decimal point and has the following
range 0.0÷100.0).
IMGT10002EN - October 06 145

Appendix D GT1000
1.1 Identification code
S1GT/SVGT 125 F B F N N N 90
SERIES
KVA SIZE (KVA=In*400V*1.73)
INPUT POWER SUPPLY F = 380V/480Vac
G = 500Vac
CONTROL BOARD B = Base (V/Hz)
B = SCONB
RFI FILTER F=Mounted

N=Absent
FIELD BUS N=Absent

SUFFIX 90 = Ozonizer
1.2 Nameplate
A nameplate is attached to every drive. It shows the rated values.

Drive type
Serial number, Product test date
Input
Voltage,Frequency, Number of phases
Rated current, Maximum symmetrical short
circuit current
Auxiliary Power supply: Voltage,
Frequency, Number of phases, Auxiliary
Rated Current
Output
Rated power
Voltage, Frequency, Number of phases
Current
146 IMGT10002EN - October 06

GT1000 Appendix D
2 ELECTRICAL DATA
“F” = ( 380 - 480 VAC )
Taglia-Frame
Output Input Output power
current current RFI filter Input reactor
Field Bus
RFI Filter
GT1000
Voltage
Keypad
Control
[@400Vac]
Brake
Suffix
Single phase Three phase
KVA
A A KVA SAP Code SAP Code

S1GT 0P3 F B B N N N 90 I 3,8 2,7 1,5 ELC22386201
S1GT 0P4 F B B N N N 90 I 5,6 3,9 2,2 1000007130 ELC22386201
S1GT 0P6 F B B N N N 90 I 9,2 6,4 3,7 ELC22386201
S1GT 008 F B B N N N 90 II 12 8,4 4,8 ELC40969901 ELC22386201
S1GT 011 F B B N N N 90 III 16 11,2 6,4 ELC40969902 ELC22386201
S1GT 015 F B B N N N 90 III 21,0 14,7 8,4 ELC40969902 ELC22386201
S1GT 018 F B B N N N 90 III 25,0 17,5 10,0 ELC40969902 ELC22386202
S1GT 022 F B B N N N 90 IIIX 32,0 22,4 12,8 ELC40969903 ELC22386203
S1GT 028 F B B N N N 90 IIIL 40 28 16 ELC40969903 ELC22386203
S1GT 036 F B N F N N 90 IIIN 48,0 33,6 19,2
S1GT 045 F B N F N N 90 IVN 61,0 42,7 24,4
S1GT 066 F B N F N N 90 IVN 90,0 63 36,0 Inside
S1GT 086 F B N F N N 90 VN 110,0 77 44,0
S1GT 125 F B N F N N 90 VIN 176,0 123 70,4
SVGT 182 F B N N N N 90 VII 234,0 164 93,6 ELC40732505 ELC22386208

SVGT 216 F B N N N N 90 VII 300,0 210 120 ELC40821101 ELC22386209
SVGT 258 F B N N N N 90 VII 360,0 252 144 ELC40821101 ELC22386210
SVGT 292 F B N N N N 90 VII 378,0 264,4 151,2 ELC40821102 ELC22386210
SVGT 340 F B N N N N 90 VII 500,0 349,7 200 ELC40821107 ELC22386211
SVGT 420 F B N N N N 90 VII 550,0 384,6 220 ELC40821107 ELC22386212
“G” = ( 500 Vac )

SVGT 258 G B N N N N 90 VII 360 252 180 ELC40821102 ELC22386210
IMGT10002EN - October 06 147

Appendix D GT1000
TECHNICAL DATA
STANDARDS
IEC 146.2
EN61800-3 (EMC)
EN 50178 (Low voltage)
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature: 0-40°C (decrease rated current by 1% °C max 55°C)
Storage temperature: from -20 to +70°C
Relative humidity: 95% (no condensation allowed)
Altitude (above s. l.): 1000m. (decrease rated current by 1% for every 100m, up to a maximum of 3000m)
Enclosure class: IP20 (protection against accidental contacts)
Forced cooling: by built in fan
MAINS CONNECTION
Three-phase voltage: Three-phase voltage:
Frequency: Frequency:
Power factor: Power factor:
Efficiency: Efficiency:
LOAD CONNECTION
Single-phase voltage: from 0 to input voltage
Frequency: 500-1000Hz
Switching frequency : 3-6 KHz
Frequency resolution: 0,1Hz
Frequency accuracy: 0,1% ( analog command), 0,01% ( digital command)
Overload: 150%x1min
CONTROL CONNECTIONS
One differential analog inputs as frequency reference:0 - +-10V, 0/4-20mA 10bit +s
One analog inputs as voltage reference: 0 - +-10V, 0/4-20mA 10bit+s
Output: +10V - 5mA (short cicuit protection)
Programmable analog output: 0-10V
2 Relay outputs (NO): 1°DRIVE OK, 2° configurable
6 optoisolated digital (24Vdc) inputs (3 programmable)
STANDARD FUNCTIONS
Scalar control (V/Hz)
Minimum and maximum frequency limits
Output frequency adjustable
Output voltage adjustable
Auto-reset e autorestart
Restart after power supply failure
Run time log
Fault indication (protectio code with three LED)
Last ten trips stored
Programmable security code (password)
PROTECTIONS
CPU fault
Overcurrent
Over/under voltage
Overtemperature
Input phase loss
Speed reference loss (4-20mA)
Output short-circuit and output ground fault
Current transducer fault
Serial link loss
External protection
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Input reactor (SVGT036-125F standard)
RFI Filter (SVGT036-125F standard)
0-10V / (0)4-20mA optoisolated converter (two channels).
Field-bus: Profibus-DP
Keypad (3 status led, 10 keys, 5 seven segments leds)
Remote kit for keypad (2m)
148 IMGT10002EN - October 06

GT1000 Appendix D
3 Connections
The following picture shows an example of connections. The load must be connected to V and W terminals(the terminal U is not connected).
The analog input 1 (terminals 14-15) is used as output frequency reference. The analog input 2 (terminals 16-17) can be used to set the output
voltage (setting rEF.06=2).
S1GT......90
SZ
TR
R L1 U
L
*
S L2 RFI V
FILTER I LOAD
T L3 W
PE PE
1
2 RL1 DRIVE OK
3
4 RL2
5 FW
6 RV
7 COM1
8 COM2
9 COM3 (reset)
10 DREN
11 24V
0V I/O
12
+10V/5mA Input +/-10V 4-20mA

13
JP2
Input
+/-10V 4-20mA 14
Pot. JP9
5 Kohm Ean1
15 475R
Analog Inputs
Input 0/10V 4-20mA 16
JP3
Ean2
17 475R
18 Analog output 1 0/10V

PWM0
19
20 B-RS485 TX/RX
21 A-RS485 TX/RX
Figure 2. – Exemple of connections
(*) The RFI filter is installed inside for the sizes S1GT033 – 121, outside for every other sizes.
** The user must install a proper output reactor or a special transformer according the bulb characteristics.

Appendix D GT1000
PROGRAMMING
XM1 Functionn Description XM1 Function Description

1-2 RL1 Relais DRIVE O.K.- (1A-220Vac-resistive load) 13 +10V +10Vdc 5mA
3-4 RL2 Programmable relais (1A-220Vac-resistive load) 14 + Ean1
Analog differential input 1: +/- 10V (configurable)
5 Start Start 15 - Ean1
7/8/9 COM1/2/3 Programmable digital inputs 16 Ean2 Analog input 1: +/- 10V (configurable)
10 DREN Drive Enable 17 0V 0V analog I/O
11 24Vdc (100mA) Digital inputs power supply 18 Analog 1 Analog output 1 (0/10V)
12 0V 0V digital I/O
It possible to control the output voltage and frequency separately.

Frequency control
The output frequency range is from 500Hz to 1000Hz.
The reference can be set either by an analog signal at the input 1 (terminals 14-15) or by the parameter rEF.07. directly on Hz.
The parameters rEF.01 and rEF.02 set the Hz at the beginning and at the end of the scale with the reference by analog signal at the input 1.
The offset, gain, filter parameters (Ain.01/02/03) and configuration parameters (Ain.15) are available.
To change the reference source it necessary to set the parameter rEF.05 (block diagram).
N.B.: Every frequency parameters are without point. The unity of measurement is: Hz.
The switching frequency is a multple of the ouptput frequency by a factor 6.
(ex: rEF.07=650Hz ⇒ FPWM=6x650=3900Hz)
Voltage control
The output voltage (as default) is set by the parameter Vvf.01, (in % of the power supply voltage).
It is possible to set the output voltage also by external signal (analog input 2) programming rEF.06=2 (see block diagram).
For this input the offset, gain, filter parameters (Ain.04/05/06) and configuration parameters (Ain.16). are available.
rEF.05
14-15 Mot.19
(+/-10V/4-20mA)
1 rPS.01 ramp Output frequency
(Mon.03)
3
rEF.07 rPS.09
Mot.20
rEF.06
1
Vvf.01
Output voltage
16-17
(0/+10V/4-20mA)
2
Figure 3. – Output frequency/ voltage block diagram

APPENDIX E PROFIBUS DP
1. General part
1.1 Installation
Profibus-DP may only be used if you have the SVGTPDP kit (code ELC452658) option which includes:
SUPRB board that will be installed on the control board (GSCMA) to the connector K4 as showed in the figure 1.
Nylon grommet nut M4
Profibus SUPRB board
Nylon screw M4
Nylon spacer M/F

Metal spacer
M3x15
M/F M3x12
Control board
Fig. 1 (indicative drawing)
The profibus does not exclude the contemporaneous utilization of the keypad or of the of the RS232 serial (protocol ANSI-x3.28-2.5-A4) on the K3
connector.
“SUPRB” board
HL3 SJ3
X2
HL4 SJ4
Meaning of the 3 led:
SJ1 HL2 • HL2 (RED Led)
The operation just entered the data
SJ2 exchange phase ( the protocol
X1 PROFIBUS-DP initializations have
X4
been successful and the data are
µC being exchanged correctly).
K2 • HL3 (GREEN Led)
The SUPRB is properly
K1
Flash eprom
X3
Fig. 2 Topographical drawing of the SUPRB board

Appendix E GT1000
1.2. Instructions for use

To use the Profibus-DP protocol make reference to the programming manual of the inverter GT1000 in the chapters 7.8.15, 7.8.16 and 7.8.17. In
general it is necessary:
1. Set S-L.02=0 to enable the serial communication.
2. Set S-L.01=3 to enable the PROFIBUS-DP protocol (or SL.01=4 if it used the RS232 serial too.
To operate these parameters it is necessary:
a) to switch on and off the inverter or
b) to reset the software (chapter 7.4 of the manual).
To do that press simultaneously SHIFT and RESET keys for about 2 seconds, terminal 10 open (Drive enable)
1.2 Useful data

Useful data (inverter parameters) may be divided into: configuration data
process data
Process data (PZD) are the inverter parameters which are continuously sent and read by the PROFIBUS Master and read and sent by the drive
(SLAVE). These parameters are processed within max. 4 ms when they arrive on the profibus board. Their value is not saved in eeprom.
When restarting the drive, process parameters will become default values. The control parameter Mon. 17 (chapter 2.2.1 of this section) belongs to
process data (it is not possible the exclusion).
Configuration data (PKW) are all inverter parameters. They can be read and written only upon the user’s request. They are processed within max.
8 ms when they arrive on the profibus board. Their value is saved in eeprom if:
1. the parameter is displayed on the keypad
2. bit 3 of the first word of the PKW message is set to 1
In general, configuration data may be changed also if the profibus Drive-Enable is active, i.e. if bit 7 of the control parameter Mon. 17 is equal to 1.
Process data and configuration data are managed by different protocols, as described here below.
1.3 General Protocol

In standard mode PROFIBUS-DP the message is called PP0 (parameter-process data-object) which is divided into two parts: PKW (Parameter ID /
Value) and PZD (Process Data).
Slaves configuration parameters are transmitted and received in the PKW field whereas the PZD field contains process data. There are five types
of PPO.
PKW PZD
PKE IND PWE PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10
......../
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
word word word word word word word word word word word word word word
PPO1
PPO2
PPO3
PPO4
PPO5
There is one PP0 at the entrance of the master and one PP0 at the exit.
The type of message you wish to send (the inserted number corresponds to the type of PPO) is selected through the S-L.14 parameter. This
parameter is accepted by the drive only if the drive is switched off and on or with a software reset. It is not possible to have a PPO whose input and
output length is different from the master.
The slave station number is selected through the S-L.13 parameter. Also in this case, the parameter is accepted only if the drive is switched off and
on or with a software reset.
Here below you will find a table of the S-L.13 and S-L.14 parameters
MINIMUM MAX DEFAULT MEANING
S-L.13 0 32 1 Station address
S-L.14 1 5 2 PPO type

GT1000 Appendix E
2. Process and configuration parameters

2.1 Process parameters
Process parameters (and all parameters in general) shall always be referred to the MASTER: they are called out if sent by the master and in if
received. Viceversa for the SLAVE (which is always the drive).
PZD1 out = Mon. 17 word command belongs to PZD parameters (it is not possible to exclude it).
• Process parameters going in the MASTER (drive output) may be in the present release: Mon.02, Mon.03, Mon.04, Mon.05 Mon.06,
Mon.07 Mon.08, Mon.09 (serial test), Mon.10, Mon.11, Mon.12, Mon.13 Mon.14, Mon.15, Mon.16.
• Process parameters going out of the MASTER (drive input) may be in the present release: Mon.17, Mon.09, ref. sum term speed / freq.,
Upper torque limit, Lower torque limit, Ref. of torque, torque ref. sum term, Proportional PID, Integral PID, Derivative PID, Auxp1, Auxp2,
Word command1, Ramp (the last four are dedicated to future developments)
The above mentioned parameters may become process data setting to 1 the respective logic parameters Sod.01÷Sod.16 and Sid.01÷Sid.16. The
change of the value of these parameters is accepted only if the inverter is switched off and on or any type of reset even remote is carried out.
Parameters going in the MASTER are selected through Sod.01÷Sod.16 whereas parameters going out of the MASTER are selected through
Sod.01÷Sod.16, as shown by the following tables:
TABLE FOR MASTER INPUT DATA

MASTER Bits to be set to 1 in order to select process data Corresponding (read) data
(Plc) Sod.01 Mon.02 Motor revolutions
Sod.02 Mon.03 Output frequency
Sod.03 Mon.04 Motor current
Sod.04 Mon.05 Thermal counter
Sod.05 Mon.06 Capacitor bank voltage
Sod.06 Mon.07 Speed / frequency ref.
Sod.07 Mon.08 Set speed / frequency ref.
Sod.08 Mon.09 Serial speed / frequency ref.
Sod.09 Mon.10 Torque reference
Sod.10 Mon.11 Torque feed-back
SLAVE Sod.11 Mon.12 Power measure
(GT1000)
Sod.12 Mon.13 Aux1
Sod.13 Mon.14 Aux2
Sod.14 Mon.15 non attiva
Sod.15 Mon.16 Word Status
Sod.16 - -
Note: For the word protection (Mon.18) see paragraph 2.10
TABLE FOR MASTER OUTPUT DATA

Bits to be set to select process data Corresponding (written) data Function enabling
sid.01(always at 1) Mon.17 Word Command A. S-
MASTER L.02=0, S-
(Plc) L.01=3
Sid.02 Mon.09 Speed / Frequency ref. B. Ref.05 o
Ref.06=6
Sid.03 / Ref. sum term C. Ref.15=3
Sid.04 / Upper torque limit automatic
Sid.05 / Lower torque limit automatic
Sid.06 / Torque reference D. Rec08=2
Sid.07 / Torque sum term E. Rec10=2
Sid.08 / Proportional PID automatic
Sid.09 / Integral PID automatic
SLAVE Sid.10 / Derivative PID automatic
(GT1000)
Sid.11 (*) Aux1p (*)
Sid.12 (*) Aux2p (*)
Sid.13 (*) Word Command 1 (*)
Sid.14 (*) Ramp (*)
Sid.15
(*) future developments Sid.16

Appendix E GT1000
2.2 How to select process parameters

To select process parameters, act as follows:
Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
let’s assume we have selected the PPO4 protocol through the S-L.14=4 parameter
Let’s begin with the parameters at the entrance of the MASTER, which may be a PLC.
Let’s assume we wish to select: Mon.02, Mon.04, Mon.06, Mon.07, Mon.15, Mon.16.
Let’s set to 1 the bits corresponding to the process data you wish to select.
If you had selected more than 6 parameters the inverter would have emitted an alarm signal (-ERPF) since the PPO4 protocol enables you to select
only 6 process parameters. This alarm may be reset only by resetting the software or by switching on the inverter after having corrected the setting.
Let’s give a look at the parameters at the exit of the master.
Let’s assume you wish to select: ref. sum term and Upper torque limit plus Word Command Mon.17 which is always set.
Let’s switch off and on the inverter or reset the software, the master will receive and transmit the selected parameters as follows
Input master = output inverter

PKW PZD
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
PPO4 non utilizzate Mon.02 Mon.04 Mon.06 Mon.07 Mon.15 Mon.16

Output master = input inverter
PKW PZD
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
PPO4 non utilizzate Termine Limite 0 0 0

“ in di
somma coppia+
The values of the process parameters are sent and received without comma. Process parameters must, if necessary, also be enabled on a
functional level.
Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Process data coming from the master shall only be taken into account if the 16th bit of the parameter Mon.17
WARNING! (word commands) is set to 1. Before writing the first word, write all process parameters, send them to the drive, set
the 16th bit of the word commands to 1 and send everything again. This will prevent you from committing
inconsistent data errors in the line at the beginning of the data exchange.
With V/F control (drv.07=1) if you enable, between the process parameter, (at the master output) the frequency
WARNING! reference (Sid.02) or the adding term (Sid.03) remember that the minimum allowed value of these parameter is 1
(corresponding to 0,1Hz). If the value 0 is sent, the Profibus diagnostics probably stops the PLC programm in
progress.
N.B.: Process parameters shall not be saved in eeprom.

GT1000 Appendix E
2.2.1 Status Word Mon.16 and Command Word Mon.17 parameter

Mon.16 is a read-only parameter. Related to the parameter S-L.15, it can assume two different meaning.
If S-L.15=0 It is the “mirror” of the state of hardware command inputs to the drive terminals and shall be interpreted as a string of zero and one.
If S-L.15=1 it is the logic l’OR between the terminals and the serial command (DRIVE ENABLE is in logic AND).
Here below we will describe the correspondence between single bits and command terminals.
Mon.16 Status Function Description

bit 0 ON/FW 1 = terminal 13 closed OR bit 0 of Mon.17=1
bit 1 FLOW / RV 1 = terminal 14 closed OR bit 1 of Mon.17=1
bit 2 RIFIN1 1 = terminal 15 closed OR bit 2 of Mon.17=1
bit 3 RIFIN2 1 = terminal 16 closed OR bit 3 of Mon.17=1
bit 4 COM1 1 = terminal 17 closed OR bit 4 of Mon.17=1
bit 7 Drive Enable 1 = terminal 20 closed AND bit 7 of Mon.17=1
bit 8 STATUS Inverter state: 1=TRIP 0=NORMAL
bit 9 NETWORK CONTROL 1 = network lack
Bit 11 Auxb1 Auxiliary bit 1
bit 12 RESET 1 = reset
bit 13 IGBT-ON Commanded IGBT
bit 14 X Reserved
bit 15 X Reserved
The reading of the status word is pointed out on the drive display through Mon.16 parameter. The coding is the following:
RUN/FW DRIVE STATUS
COM2 FL/RV
COM3
COM1 RIFIN1 RESET
RIFIN2 DRIV.ENABLE
For example: if S-L.15=0 and terminals 10 (DRIVE EN.), 5 (RUN/FW) and 6 (FL/RV) are closed, will be read in Mon.16.:
RUN/FW DRIVE STATUS
COM2 FL/RV
COM3
COM1 RIFIN1 RESET
RIFIN2 DRIV.ENABLE
Through the Profibus, enabling the reading of the status word (Sod.15=1), you will read the value on base 10 (131 =128+2+1).
The word command transmitted through the serial is written in Mon.17 (address 196). The coding on the Mon.17 parameter is directly in
hexadecimal format.
Writing only occurs on the RAM level, nothing is saved in EEPROM. At the start it is automatically set to 0. The correspondence between the bits of
the transmitted word and the commands it operates has already been described for Mon.16 (See the following table).
Mon.17 Command Function Description
bit 0 DRIVE/ FW 1 = drive/FW in OR with terminal 13
bit 1 FLOW / RV 1= enable the function FLOW/RV in OR with terminal 14
bit 2 RIFIN1 1 = enable the programmed function (default = RP1) in Or with 15
bit 3 RIFIN2 1 = enable the programmed function (default = ET) in Or with 16
bit 4 COM1 1 = enable the programmed function (default = CF1) in Or with 17
bit 7 Drive Enable 1 = enable the commands if terminal 20 is closed on 24
bit 8-14 X X
bit 15 X 1= data valid on profibus line
Note: when the drive is controlled by the serial port, S-L.02=0, it can receive the commands through Mon.17. If the parameter S-L.03=0 the hardware
commands that it normally receives from the terminal board remain active and are in logic OR with the ones received from the serial port.

Appendix E GT1000
The only exception regards terminal 10. The Drive Enable command in fact is managed by keeping the hardware input a priority.
*) If the terminal is open the drive is certainly disabled ( rdy). The command from the serial port, bit 7 of Mon.17, is not enough for enabling the
drive.
**) If terminal 10 is closed and S-L.03 = 0, the serial port should confirm or not the enabling of the inverter:
set to 1 on bit 7 on Mon.17 the drive is enabled and the start/stop commands are operative.
set to 0 the drive is disabled and the motor is left running freely.
If the parameter S-L.03=1 the active commands are hardware command (terminals) only.
Example: Terminal 10 is connected with terminal 11 and S-L.03=0. A Command word= 80A1 on Mon.17 (coding base 16) means:
- enabled drive
- start command
- rEF.09 active.
- consistant data on Profibus line
The “reference from a serial interface” indicated in the block diagram as Ser. is addressed on Mon.09. After selecting value 6 or parameter
rEF.05 or rEF.06 and after enabling it with the contacts (or equivalent commands) CF1, CF2 and CF3, the reference can be changed through
the serial port according to the needs of the working cycle or according to the control needs without affecting the non-volatile storage of the
drive. Certainly, rEF.01 could be enabled through the serial port and the reference could be changed by modifying the value of rEF.01 itself;
this method is allowed, but it is not recommended because it involves repeated and useless writing on the EEPROM of the control board.
☞ WARNING! These devices allow only a limited number of writing operations.
2.3 Diagnostics on the process parameters

The process parameter errors, that regard only the range limits, are sent through an extended diagnostics. Remember that the standard Profibus-
DP foresees a 6 byte fixed diagnostics, which can also be extended up to 16 bytes in case of Masters managed by IM308-B boards (for other
boards see the manufacturer’s manuals).
In this case, 16 bytes including the standard 6 are sent. The seventh byte indicates the length of the message that in this case is equal to 10, the
eighth byte is the error code that in this case is 0 and the ninth byte is the address of the wrong process data. The other bytes are checking codes
that the user should not consider.
Consider the previous example and try sending value 350 for the Upper Torque Limit. This value exceeds the limit for the parameter therefore the
inverter will send the following message:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16
octet octet octet octet octet octet octet octet octet octet octet octet octet
* * * * * * Header. err cod. addres. + + + +
Symbols used: * : see Standard DIN 19245 profibus number 3
+ : byte that should not be considered even if it is written
Header: length of the extended diagnostics.
error. cod.: error code.
address.: address (position of the message) of the wrong process parameter.
To check whether the inverter sent the extended diagnostics just trigger on bit number 7 of byte 3 of the standard diagnostic. This bit is 1 if the
extended diagnostic was sent otherwise it is 0. This bit is not reset if the error persists.
As regards the value of the address that is sent consider the previous example:
PKW PZD
PKE IND PWE PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
word word word word word word word word word word word word
PPO4 Not used Mon.17 Sum term + torque limit 0 0 0
Consider that the value 6020 was sent for the Sum term and value 390 for the Upper torque limit. The inverter, considering that these values are
incompatible with the parameter limits, does not memorize them nor does it send the extended diagnostics. The address of the wrong parameter
will be 2.
This means that the drive will display the address according to the position of the parameter in the PP0 message always and only the wrong
parameter of the message.
Therefore once the parameter Sum term has been corrected, the inverter will send the extended diagnostics again with address equal to 1,
because the parameter Upper torque limit will still be wrong. Once even this figure is corrected the extended diagnostics won’t be sent again.
When only one process figure is wrong, all the process parameters which were sent with it are not memorized during the operation. This situation
will last until the error on the wrong parameter is corrected.
ATTENTION: The following situation could occur. Consider the previous example again. If the Sum term is wrong, the Upper torque limit is not
memorized like the previous one which is wrong, but if only the second parameter is out of limit, the first parameter is memorized the first time and
then any further change is rejected by the operation until the error on the second persists.

GT1000 Appendix E
2.4 Configuration data

The configuration data are all the parameters of the inverter.
The EEPROM of the drive can memorize the configuration data in 2 ways (if it allowed):
• if displayed on the keypad.
• setting to 1 bit 3 of the message of the first word of the PKW message.
The configuration data are programmed through the PPO part of the message called PKW. For example, consider the PPO2 protocol in input upon
operation and in output at the master
PKW PZD
PKE IND PWE PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
word word word word word word word word word word
PPO2 not used for the data configuration

Consider the PKW master output message.
The first word is used to indicate the type of requested operation, which could be: no operation, read or write.
No operation
15 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Reading
15 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
Writing without saving the value in eeprom
15 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
Writing and saving the value in eeprom
15 3 2 1 0
1 0 1 1
The second word (IND) of the PKW Master output message contains the address of the parameter of the drive that you want to change or read.
Note: See chapter 7 for the complete list of the parameters serial address. Some parameters have double address one for V/Hz control and the
second for FOC control.
The third word of the PKW Master output message is not considered for the time being: it must be set to zero.
The fourth word of the PKW Master output message contains the value of the module figure set to 2 in case a writing is requested.
Let’s consider the PKW master input message.

The first word (PKE) contains the code of the requested operation with bit 2 set to 1 if the required operation is not accepted or because a non-
existing parameter was requested or because a value that exceeds the limit for the relevant parameter was set. Bit three (writing in eeprom) of the
master output word is not contained in this last word.
The address of the parameter requested for the chosen operation through the word PKE returns to the second word (IND).
The third word for now is zero and it does not have to be considered by a Master.
The fourth word has the module value set to 2 of the requested parameter (if it has a sign) if the operation selected was the reading one otherwise
it will be the value that we have tried to set with a writing operation.
If the requested operation was not successful the error code is displayed again and the fourth word is equal to zero.
Practically the protocol for the down-load of the parameters works in the following way:
• the relevant PKW message is sent from the Master
• before carrying out a new operation you have to wait for the eco-back of the previous request.
The following example describes the procedure more clearly: you want to read the content of the parameter Ref.07 (ind=128) that is equal to 1002.

Appendix E GT1000
The master output message will be the following:

PKW PZD
STAT/ HZ/
COMM. rev/min
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PPO4 1 128 0 0 not used for the configuration data

After a certain period of time the master input message (the time depends on the processing of the operation and on the interval according to which
the PPO is sent from the Master) will be the following:
PKW PZD
STAT/ HZ/
COMM. rev/min
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PPO4 1 128 0 1002 not used for the configuration data

The Master can move to another operation only after receiving this message. The master output message must remain the same until the answer
arrives.
2.5 Example on the use of the process and configuration parameters

To really understand the PKW and PZD protocol consider this last example.
Consider the standard PPO2 message that allows the sending of the process data (PZD) and configuration data (PKW).
The first operation should be choosing value 2 through parameter S-L.14 which corresponds to the standard PPO2 message. Then choose the
number of the station through parameter S-L.13. This number cannot be lower than 3 because for a lot of masters 1 and 2 are not allowed as
station numbers.
After choosing the number of the station choose 6 process data through the following parameters: Sod.xx and Sid.xx.
Suppose you want the following as Master output parameters: Upper torque limit, Lower torque limit, Torque ref. Sum term, Proportional PID,
besides the commands and the revolution reference commands and the revolution reference. The Sid.xx bit can be programmed as follows:
Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid Sid
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Suppose you want the following as Master input parameters: Mon.03, Mon.04 and Mon.11 besides the state and the revolution of the motor. The bit
Sod.xx bit will be programmed as follows:
Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod Sod
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
After carrying out these operations set S-L.02 to 0 and then switch the inverter on and off. The inverter switches off to in order to accept the already
programmed parameters (or carry out a software reset).
At this point if the master is in line and if it has been programmed correctly, it should communicate with the inverter to see its operation.
The master can read the process data coming from the operation and it can send the process parameter to the inverter. The inverter always reads
the word command (Mon.17) coming from the master and if it finds the sixteenth bit of this parameter set to 1 even the other process data will be
read. We recommend sending all the process parameters once at the beginning of the communication to the master and then re-send all of them
with bit 15 of the word command set to 1. This operation should be carried out only at the beginning of the communication.
The following illustrations will describe the example more clearly.
First communication. Master output message:
PKW PZD
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6
PPO2 Not considered 0 40 +50 -50 25 3000
Besides Mon.17 the inverter reads the words considering the values contained in the double module, therefore - 50 in hexadecimal will be FFB0H.

GT1000 Appendix E
Second communication. Master output message:

PKW PZD
COMM. HZ/
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PPO2 not considered 8000H 40 +50 -50 25 3000
Since the sixteenth bit of the word commands is set to 1 the inverter will also read the successive process data.
Third communication. Master output message
PKW PZD
COMM. Hz
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PPO2 not considered 8000H 40 +50 -50 35 3500
At this point if the process parameters change the sixteenth bit of the word commands can remain set to 1, it doesn’t have to be set to 0 and then to
1. In case bit 15 of the word commands is set to zero the inverter does not take into account the process parameters coming from the master, that
is it saves the last value that was sent. This does not mean that it no longer gives the Master input process parameters.
Practically, the following table summarizes the situation.
PROCESS DATA
N.° word input master=output inverter output master=input inverter
1 Mon.02 Command
2 Mon.03 Revolutions reference
3 Mon.04 Upper torque limit
4 Mon.11 Lower torque limit
5 Status=Mon.16 ref. torque sum term
6 0 Proportional PID
Remember that the parameters chosen as process data are not saved in eeprom.
Now let’s consider changing the rEv.01 (63) parameter. This parameter does not belong to the group of process parameters.
Consider the Master output PPO2 message with the writing request of value 3100 on parameter number 63
PKW PZD
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9 10
PPO2 0003H 63 0 3100 Com. Ref. g. Cop+ Cop- S Cop P PID

After a certain period of time, which depends on the slave quantity on the line and on the number of exchanged word, the following master input
message will appear:
PKW PZD
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9 10
PPO2 0003H 63 0 3100 Mon02 Mon03 Mon04 Mon11 Mon16 0

If we tried to program the parameter with the value 8500(>8000) the return message PPO2 would have been the following:
PKW PZD
COMM. HZ
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9 10
PPO2 0007H 63 0 0 Mon02 Mon03 Mon04 Mon11 Mon16 0

Note that the second low-order bit of the PKE word is 1; this means that the operation was wrong.

Appendix E GT1000
If the code of the relevant operation and the address of the relevant parameter (ECO correct) reached the master input another PKW message can
be sent. In case no parameter is being configured or if you want to do it after a certain period of time it is a good idea to send the following PKW
message.
PKW PZD
COMM.
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9 10
PPO2 0 0 0 0 Com. Ref. g. Cop+ Cop- S Cop P PID
Thus the inverter is no longer forced to process the PKW message.
2.6 Remote software reset through profibus

The remote software reset through profibus uses: the parameter with a 319 address and the PKW message. The parameter is not displayed on the
keypad, it cannot be saved in eeprom and it can be written or read only through profibus.
Follow this procedure to reset the software.
• disable the drive commands, including Drive Enable.
• bit 3 of the first word of the PKW message must be set to 0.
• write 1 in logic 1, by using the PKW message, (rLo.01=1)
• write 0017H in the parameter with 319 address, by using the PKW message,
• write0000H in the parameter with 319 address, by using the PKW message,
• wait for about 5 seconds for the reset to start.
N.B.: when the operation is being reset the master does not detect it for about at least 3 seconds, therefore be very careful in this situation.
2.7 Upper and lower torque limits

The meaning of the Upper torque limit (C+) and Lower torque limit (C-) process parameters was changed in relation to the equivalent accessible
parameters as configuration parameters (see block diagram). The modification can be summarized as follows:
Il C+ represents the upper torque limit and can even have negative values, and in any case higher than C-.
Il C- represents the lower torque limit and can even have positive values, and in any case lower than C+.
Furthermore parameter C+ has “priority” over C- in the field of values higher than 0, whereas parameter C- has priority over C+ in the field of values
lower than 0. This means that for example if C+ is higher than +100 and you try to bring C- to a higher value (p.e. +115) this will stop at +100. On
the other hand if C- is +50 and you try to bring C+ from +100 to -10, this will move to zero and drag along C- because in the positive value field C+
has priority, but it does move to negative values because in this field C- has priority.
2.9 t-SL alarm

This alarm appear when:
• the PROFIBUS board doesn’t work properly (the dual-port ram does not work or it is not written correctly).
• the MASTER abandoned the line.
NOTE: The operation automatically moves to reset position when the MASTER re-establishes the communication after previously interrupting it.
Under these conditions the MASTER will reset the operation setting to 1 bit.12 of the word commands Mon.17.

GT1000 Appendix E
F. 2.10 Profibus Emergency Management

It is possible using the Profibus, to start quickly the operation in “local” mode, if there are problems on the communication line that block the inverter
(protection “t-SL”).
The user can pre-set one of the 3 configurable digital inputs (terminals 7-8-9) by setting the related parameter din on 15. Should there be
connection failures, the user can go back immediately to the operation in “local” mode by closing the configured terminal and restarting to control
the motor according to the usual modes without need to intervene on the programming parameters and without having to switch off and then on
again the drive.
When the terminal is closed, the control performs the following actions:
1) The process parameters enabled automatically stop to obscure the traditional parameters and these latter return to be active as in the operation
without Profibus or with Sid on zero.
2) When the inverter is blocked due to permanent lost of Profibus communication (“t-SL”), the functional reset of the alarm through the configured
terminal has no effect, since the cause of the block condition has not been removed and it occurs immediately again.
If instead the terminal is enabled, then the cause of the block “t-SL” or “Er-PF” is ignored until the terminal itself remain controlled. Moreover, on the
terminal enabling front, it is performed automatically the reset of the alarm “t-SL” or Er-PF” and the operation can start again. On the enabling front,
it is performed also a zeroing of the serial reference (Mon.09) and of the command word (Mon.17), then, until the terminal remains enabled, the
exchange of the two zeroed word is suspended, as well as that of the process parameters selected using the Sid (in realty the exchange on the
RAM dual port occurs, but it does not pass to the inverter control card).
3) During the emergency, even the exchange of any configuration parameter is stopped (PKW). In this case, the drive manages as it would write on
a protected parameter, therefore the diagnostic is enabled and the master can understand that the writings were not successful.
From serial (ANSI), until there is not the emergency status, it is prevented to receive commands, and if Sid.02=1 also the speed reference is
stopped. When the device reaches the emergency status, they are released and they can be exploited for this phase.
4) It has been introduced the parameter S-L.16.
With the parameter S-L.03 on 0, the drive commands are given by the logic OR between the hardware commands (terminal board) and the serial
ones, exception made for DE (DRIVE ENABLE) that is in logic AND between hardware and serial.
Now, with S-L.16 on 0, the logic remains unchanged, therefore, in case of Profibus loss, the drive would require in any case the DE command
(terminal 10) from serial (bit 7 of the word Mon.17 address=196).
Instead, if S-.L.16 is set on 1, when reaching the emergency status, (closing of the dedicated terminal) the drive commands are always in logic OR,
but for the DE command it is necessary and sufficient the closing of the terminal 10. In this way, it is possible to restart immediately with the
“exclusively local” commands.
The table sums up shortly the 2 cases:
S-L.16 Behaviour employ

0 OR commands + DE form serial on Mon.17 If there are Profibus and serial ANSI contemporaneously
1 OR commands + DE form terminal board If one wishes to go to local control (hardware) S-L.03=0
NB: The enabling of the terminal has the same effect both in block situation with alarm “t-SL” and without block.

Appendix E GT1000
2.11. Alarm codes

The protection word (Mon.18) reading through process parameters use the auxiliary variable Aux.1.
Setting it by diA.01=13 and enabling Sod.12 it is possible to read the active protection code through Profibus.
It is also possible, in the same way, to read the storage of the last alarm. In this case we set the meaning of the auxiliary variable Aux.2 by
diA.02=13 and through Sod.13 we enable the reading.
The protections code is showed in the following table.
Word protection Mon.18 mnemonic Alarm description

1 --OU Overvoltage on bus DC
2 --UU Undervoltage on bus DC
3 -dOC DC overcurrent
4 --OC Overcurrent
5 --Et External Trip
6 --th Motor thermal protection
7 --OH Inverter radiator overtemperature
8 --cL Current Loss (4-20mA)
9 -HArd Control board hardware malfunctioning
10 -EEPr Error in writing/reading E2prom
11 -ErFn Consistency error of motor parameters
12 -Enc Wrong connections of the encoder
13 -t-SL Alarm set off through serial port or Profibus malfunctioning
14 -I-PF Voltage dips alarm
15 PAr-F
16 PAr-F
17 --OUS Overvoltage on the network
18 -O-SP Overspeed
19 --OUS POK alim. 24Vdc pilot.
20 -O-SP TLR I Brake Fail
21 no-AL /
22 -ErPF Alarm reset from profibus
23 -Ptc- PTC motor thermal protection
2.12 GSD file

In order to properly set a master Profibus it is necessary the identification files of the Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali drives (slave), that will be used
by the programming software of the master.
These files are supplied to the customers that use for the first time Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali drives equipped with Profibus board. It is possible
ask for these files to the operational unit Industrial Automation and System.
The files provide the following three directory:
- SiemS5: GSD file for PLC S5 (Siemens).
- SiemS7: GSD file for PLCS7 (Siemens).
- Gen9030-70: GSD file for PLC 9030 and 9070 series (General Electric)

QA168 Rev. 02
MONTEBELLO VICENTINO - ITALY
DECLARATION OF “CE” CONFORMITY CE / 07

Issued according to the “H Form” (complete Quality Assurance) of the CE conformity evaluation procedure (Directive 93/465/EC)
Manufacturer: Answer Drives S.r.l.

Head Office: Viale Sarca, 336 – 20126 Milano – Italy
Manufacturer’s Address:
Operation Site S.S. 11 – Cà Sordis, 4 - 36054 Montebello Vicentino (VI) – Italy
DECLARES, on its own exclusive responsibility, that the products:
Product Product Family GT1000
Product Description: Inverter with power range from 1.5 kW to 200 kW
according to the verifications performed, comply with the requirements of the:
European Community Directive 2006/95/EC

called “Low Voltage” Directive
The products have been manufactured according to the harmonized Technical Standard:
CENELEC EN 50178
corresponding to Standard CEI 22-15
Moreover, they comply, according to the tests performed, with the requirements of the:
European Community Directive 89/336/EEC

modified by modified 93/68/EEC, called “EMC” Directive
since they comply with the harmonized Technical Standard:
CENELEC EN 61800-3
corresponding to the Publication IEC 61800-3 (edition 2005) and to the Standard CEI 22-10
provided that they are installed according to the instructions contained in the use and installation manual, in the
machine diagrams and in the documents eventually drawn concerning electromagnetic compatibility. In
determining the acceptation limits the installation environment, as well as the distribution and circulation modes
of the products have to be taken into consideration. Moreover, it is herewith declared that the products have
been manufactured workmanlike according to the instructions/warnings communicated by the suppliers of the
components.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
To allow their installation on a machine, the products are coordinated with the applicable requirements of the
harmonized Technical Standard:
CENELEC EN 60204-1
corresponding to the Publication IEC 60204-1 (edition 1997) and to the Standard CEI 44-5
Answer Drives S.r.l.

The Director Montebello Vicentino, 2007, September 30
Ambrogio Boselli
The Quality System of Answer Drives S.r.l. is certified ISO 9001:2000

Certificate issued on 05 October 1994 by RINA
QA169 Rev. 02
MONTEBELLO VICENTINO - ITALY
DECLARATION OF INCORPORATION
According to Machinery Directive 98/37/EC
Declaration drawn according to Enclosure B of Directive 98/37/EC (former 89/392/EEC)
Manufacturer: Answer Drives S.r.l.

Head Office: Viale Sarca, 336 – 20126 Milano – Italy
Manufacturer’s Address:
Operation Site S.S. 11 – Cà Sordis, 4 - 36054 Montebello Vicentino (VI) – Italy
DECLARES, on its own exclusive responsibility, that the products:
Product Product Family GT1000
Product Description: Inverter with power range from 1.5 kW to 200 kW
have to be installed according to our installation manuals and cannot be operated until the
machine, in which they are incorporated and within which they are considered to be
components, has been declared complying with the "Machinery Directive 98/37/EC".

The Director Montebello Vicentino, 2007, September 30
Ambrogio Boselli
The Quality System of Answer Drives S.r.l. is certified ISO 9001:2000

Certificate issued on 05 October 1994 by RINA
Head Office:
Viale Sarca, 336 – 20126 Milano - Italia
Operation Site:
S.S 11 Cà Sordis, 4 I-36054 Montebello Vicentino (VI) - Italia
Ph. +39 0444 449268
F +39 0444 449276
1000088613
www. answerdrives.com

AD - GT1000 Man-EN - 1000088613-05-07 C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AD - GT1000 Man-EN - 1000088613-05-07 C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT1000

Hardware & Software Manual

Answer Drives S.r.l. - Partially owned by Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali -S.p.A.

HARDWARE AND SOFWARE MANUAL

For further information and comments, please contact us at:

7 Startup-Test-Display and Programming

It indicates operations in whose field electrostatic discharges must be avoided.

☞ Generic WARNING symbol.

REMARK It is used to explain an instruction, an operation of repairing or other.

3 Generic REMARK symbol.

DANGER! RISK OF FIRE, SERIOUS DAMAGE!

DANGER! RISK OF FIRE, SERIOUS DAMAGE OR INJURIES!

DANGER! RISK OF DEATH OR ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Warranty and limitsof liability

2.1 Reception, unload, unpacking and inspection of the inverter

2.1.1 Unpacking sizes I, II, III, IIIX, IIIL

2.1.2 Unpacking sizes IV, V, VI

2.1.3 Unpacking size VII

2.3 Technical data

2.3.2 Electric Data Plate

Figure 2.3.2 Electric data plate

2.3.3 Environmental conditions admitted

Table 2-1 Admitted environmental conditions

2.3.4 Electric Data

Table 2.2. Electric Data

Table 2.3.5. Data for ventilation

Inverter Output current Power losses Ventilation Ventilator Rated Data

2.3.6 Overall dimensions and weights

EN 50178 Electronic equipment for the use in power installations.

The file number of Answer Drives S.r.l. is: E226584

• Do not mount the inverter on surfaces undergoing vibrations.

I - II 25 / 1 100 / 3.9 100 / 3.9

III - IIIL - IIIX 50 / 2 100 / 3.9 100 / 3.9

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR

STOP MAN AUTO RESET

Figure 3.1 Inverter Size

NOTE For IP54 version ask to “Application department”.

Frames III, IV, VN

3.2 Electric Installation

3.2.1 Diagram of connections for power and control

Figure 3.2.1 Diagram of power connections

Figure 3.2.2 Connection example

3.2.2 Cables of power supply, fuses of power supply and auxiliaries

3.3 MANDATORY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION ACCORDING TO THE EMC DIRECTIVE

Classification of categories according to environments

3.3.1 Solutions to fulfil conducted emission requirements

3.3.2 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI) FILTER

3.3.2.1 RFI FILTER (codes: see Table 3A.5)

For this drive the filter is

STOP MAN AUTO RESET

Kit SAP code:

3.3.3 GT1000 COMPLIANCE WITH IEC 61800-3

2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation.

3.3.4 MOTOR CABLE

3.3.4.2 TYPE OF CABLES BETWEEN INVERTER AND MOTORS

d) Not allowed cable

e) Not allowed cable

f) Not allowed cable

Connections Inverter - Motor with symmetrical shielded cable

Connections – converter side:

• Control signal cables must be

Figure 3A.5.4.3 Cable Routing

S1GT S1GT S1GT S1GT S1GT S1GT